User Manual: HD Visual Communication Unit

User Manual
HD Visual Communication Unit
KX-VC1000/KX-VC1300/KX-VC1600/KX-VC2000
Model No.
KX-VC1000SX/KX-VC1300SX/KX-VC1600SX/KX-VC2000SX
KX-VC1300A/KX-VC1600A
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.

Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
KX-VC1000/KX-VC1300/KX-VC1600/KX-VC2000: Software File Version 5.00 or later
In this manual, the suffix of each model number (e.g., KX-VCA001XX) is omitted unless necessary.
In this manual, HD Visual Communication is abbreviated as "HDVC".
Document Version: 2018-01

Introduction
Introduction
Feature Highlights
Display Display
Video
camera
Computer
Microphone
Computer
Display Internet Display
Video
Intranet camera
Router
Video
camera NAT Traversal
Service
Microphone
Microphone Router
Lifelike Video Conference Call

You can experience lifelike video conference calls with smooth, high-quality video and clear stereo*1 sound.
*1
If using 2 or more Digital Boundary Microphones, stereo output can be enabled through system settings (Page 128). When using
Digital Boundary Microphones and an Analogue Boundary Microphone together, stereo output may be unavailable depending on the
connection configuration (Page 31, Page 33).
Home Electronics-style Remote Control Operation and Simple, Easy to

Understand Graphical User Interface
You can make settings and perform operations using familiar remote control operations and a simple, easy to
understand interface.
Stabilised Communication Quality

In periods of network congestion, automatic packet transmission rate quality control prevents packet loss to
maintain a video conference call’s image and sound quality. This allows video conference calls with stabilised
communication quality even over an Internet connection or mobile communication.
2 User Manual Document Version 2018-01

Introduction
Dual stream (2 screens) compatible

You can send the image of your video camera and the image of your computer’s screen or a sub video camera
at the same time to the other party.
You can view the other party and check shared data at the same time to hold more realistic and interactive
meetings.
Dual network compatibility (KX-VC1600/KX-VC2000)

You can connect to different networks at the same time, such as your company’s internal network and the
Internet. This allows seamless connectivity with units both inside and outside of your company.
Multi-party connections
The KX-VC1000 can establish connections with 2 parties standard, and is expandable to establish multiple
connections with a maximum of 4 parties. The KX-VC1300 can establish multiple connections with a maximum
of 4 parties. The KX-VC1600 can establish multiple connections with a maximum of 6 parties standard, and is
expandable to a maximum of 10 parties. The KX-VC2000 can establish multiple connections with a maximum
of 16 parties standard, and is expandable to a maximum of 20 or 24 parties. All devices have MCU functions
built-in, allowing for flexible connectivity.
Note
• In this manual, 1 unit with a built-in MCU which connects to multiple sites simultaneously is referred
as to the "Main Site", and the sites connecting to the Main Site are referred to as "Sub Sites". A site
that establishes connections to multiple sites using a Profile Call (Page 54), or a site that adds a site
to the call during a 2-party video conference call with another site (Page 67) becomes the "Main
Site".
Selectable Video Source

By connecting your computer or video camera to the unit, you can show your computer’s screen or video
camera image to video conference call participants (Page 89).
Encrypted Communication
Packets sent for video conference calls can be encrypted to prevent packet leaks, tampering, or
eavesdropping.
KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service

"KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service" is a service that allows you to easily and affordably set up and operate
a communication environment for the HD Visual Communication Unit.*1*2*3 Also, complicated router
configuration is unnecessary, which allows even people who are not network administrators set up a
communication environment. Furthermore, you can assign the unit a unique number (Terminal ID), which
allows the unit to be called not by IP address, but with the unique 7-digit number. This means communication
can be initiated as if calling a telephone. Communication can also be encrypted, so that you can communicate
over the Internet safely and securely.
For details about KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service, refer to the following web site:
Document Version 2018-01 User Manual 3

Introduction
https://panasonic.net/cns/psn/products/hdvc/nat/nat_traversal/index.html
*1
This service may be unavailable depending on the country/area of use. For details, contact your dealer.
*2
This service may be unavailable depending on your router’s type or your Internet connection environment. For details, contact your
dealer.
*3
IPv6 addresses cannot be used.
Making Video Conference Calls via SIP Server

By using a SIP server, you can establish video conference calls not just by IP address, but also by specifying
a SIP URI (SIP user name@SIP domain name) instead. If the other party uses the same SIP domain name
as you, you can make a video conference call by specifying only the SIP user name. For information about
supported SIP servers, contact your dealer.
Calling via an H.323 Gatekeeper

Going through an H.323 Gatekeeper allows communication of not just the IP address, by the H.323 extension
and the H.323 name as well. Contact your dealer regarding the gatekeepers that can be used.
Enhanced Features through the Use of Activation Keys

By using an activation key (sold separately), you can upgrade the features of the unit (Page 20). This allows
enrollment in the KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service, and enables Mobile Connection, Multicast, and USB
Device Mode features.
If using the KX-VC2000, multiple connections can be made with up to 20 or 24 parties simultaneously. If using
the KX-VC1600, multiple connections can be made with up to 10 parties simultaneously. The KX-VC1000 can
establish connections with a maximum of 4 parties and also supports dual monitors.
Remote Video Camera Operation via Remote Control

You can move your own video camera up, down, left, and right as well as zoom in and out (Page 92). You
can also register up to 9 preset patterns of video camera direction and zoom level which allows you to easily
change the video camera’s direction and zoom level by selecting a preset (Page 95, Page 97). Additionally,
you can also use your remote control to control the other party’s video camera.*1
*1
To be able to control another party’s video camera, settings must be configured on the other party’s unit (Page 131).
IPv6 Address
Communication can be made using IPv6 addresses. IPv6 addresses can also be used for SIP Servers and H.
323 Gatekeepers.
USB Recording
You can record video and audio of conferences and save them on a USB memory device that is connected to
the USB jack on the back of the unit (Page 82, Page 132, Page 183).

Introduction
Trademarks
• The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
• Polycom® is a trademark owned by Polycom, Inc. in the US and other countries.
• Microsoft, Encarta, MSN, and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Mozilla and Firefox are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
• QuickTime is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
Licences
• THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE
REMUNERATION TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC
VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A
PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE
AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
• This product incorporates G.722.1 and G.722.1 Annex C licensed by Polycom®.
• This product incorporates Qt library licenced by Digia Plc. Please read "EULA" of system settings of this
product.
Open Source Software

Parts of this product use Open Source Software supplied based on the conditions of the Free Software
Foundation’s GPLs and/or LGPLs, and the conditions of the ITU-T and other conditions. Relevant conditions
apply to this software. Therefore, please read license information about GPLs, LGPLs, and ITU-T, and
"License Info." of system settings of this product before using this product. Also, some software parts of this
product are licensed under the MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE (MPL). At least three (3) years from delivery of
products, Panasonic will give to any third party who contacts us at the contact information provided below, for
a charge of no more than the cost of physically distributing source code, a complete machine-readable copy
of the corresponding source code and the copyright notices covered under GPL, LGPL, MPL, and ITU-T.
Please note that software licensed under GPL, LGPL, MPL, and ITU-T is not under warranty.
Contact Information
http://www.panasonic.net/corporate/global_network/
Miscellaneous
About the Screen Shots and Illustrations in this Manual
The screen shots and descriptions in this manual are based on using the KX-VC2000 (when used with
enhanced features). However, some of the screens shots are based on using the KX-VC1600. If you are using
the KX-VC1000, KX-VC1300, KX-VC1600, or KX-VC2000 (without using the enhanced features), please note
that some displayed features will not be available for your model. Also please note that the illustrations in this
manual are based on using the KX-VC1600.

Introduction
Copyright
• The software used in this product uses source code from Radvision Ltd.
Portions of this software are © 1996-2012 RADVISION Ltd. All intellectual property rights in such portions
of the Software and documentation are owned by RADVISION and are protected by United States copyright
laws, other applicable copyright laws and international treaty provisions. RADVISION and its suppliers
retain all rights not expressly granted.
• Except for open source software licensed under GPL/LGPL and so on, distributing, copying, disassembling,
reverse compiling and reverse engineering of the software provided with this product are all expressly
prohibited. In addition, exporting any software provided with this product violating export laws is prohibited.

Table of Contents
Table of Contents
For Your Safety ......................................................................................11
For Your Safety ...............................................................................................................11
Before Operation ....................................................................................13
Notes about Operation ...................................................................................................13
Data Security ...................................................................................................................14
Privacy and Right of Publicity .......................................................................................14
Precaution ...............................................................................................15
Precaution ........................................................................................................................15
Preparation .............................................................................................17
Accessory/Optional Accessory Information ................................................................17
Optional Accessory ........................................................................................................18
Part Names and Usage ...................................................................................................22
Main Unit (Front) ............................................................................................................22
Main Unit (Back) .............................................................................................................23
Remote Control ..............................................................................................................25
LED Indication ................................................................................................................27
Screen Standby ..............................................................................................................27
Connection and Preparation ..........................................................................................29
Device and Network Connection ....................................................................................29
Connecting the Unit ........................................................................................................30
Network Configuration Example .....................................................................................37
Preparing the Remote Control ........................................................................................39
Turning the Power On/Off ..............................................................................................40
Screen Display ................................................................................................................41
Home Screen (Idle Screen) ............................................................................................41
Menu Screen (Idle Screen) ............................................................................................44
Video Conference Call Screen .......................................................................................45
Entering characters ........................................................................................................47
About IPv6 Addresses ....................................................................................................47
Initial Settings ..................................................................................................................48
Starting a Video Conference .................................................................51
Making a Video Conference Call ....................................................................................51
Calling Using One-Touch Connection Numbers From the Home Screen ......................51
Calling from the Contact List (2-party Conference) ........................................................52
Calling Using Profile (Multiple-party Video Conference Calls) .......................................54
Calling by Entering an Address Directly .........................................................................56
Calling from the Call History ...........................................................................................59
Answering a Video Conference Call ..............................................................................63
Connecting to an MCU ....................................................................................................65
During Video Conference Calls ............................................................67
Adding Parties to an Existing Video Conference Call (Except Sub Sites) ................67
Disconnecting Parties During Video Conference Call .................................................69
Changing the Contents Sharing Method During Communication ..............................70
Changing the Screen Layout during a Video Conference Call ...................................71
Changing the Other Party’s Screen Display Layout ....................................................72
Changing the MCU Mode (Main Site Only) ...................................................................77
Changing the Setting of the Main Display (Main Site only) .........................................78

Table of Contents
Changing the Site Name Display (Main Site only) .......................................................80

Changing the Audio Settings for Other Parties (Main Site only) ................................81
Changing the Settings for Audio Mixing Sites (Main Site Only) .................................82
Starting and Stopping Recording ..................................................................................82
Checking the Call History ...............................................................................................84
Adjusting the Volume .....................................................................................................85
Muting the Microphone ...................................................................................................86
Reducing Microphone Noise ..........................................................................................88
Displaying a Computer’s Screen and the Sub Video Camera’s Image ......................89
Controlling a Video Camera ..................................................................92
Controlling a Video Camera ...........................................................................................92
Registering a Preset .......................................................................................................95
Recalling a Registered Preset ........................................................................................97
Changing Video Camera Settings .................................................................................98
Displaying the Connection Status ......................................................103
Displaying the Connection Status ...............................................................................103
Displaying Unit Information .........................................................................................104
Contacts and Settings .........................................................................105
Adding Contacts to the Contact List ...........................................................................105
Registering a New Contact ...........................................................................................105
Editing Contact Information ..........................................................................................106
Deleting a Contact ........................................................................................................106
Registering a Contact from the Call History .................................................................107
Registering a Profile .....................................................................................................108
Registering a New Profile .............................................................................................108
Editing Profile Information ............................................................................................111
Deleting a Profile ..........................................................................................................111
Setting the Profile Standby ...........................................................................................112
Removing a Profile Standby .........................................................................................112
Making Local Site Settings ...........................................................................................113
Registering a Local Site ...............................................................................................113
Selecting a Local Site ...................................................................................................113
Deleting Local Site Information ....................................................................................114
Changing System Settings/Performing System Maintenance ..................................115
Setting the Unit Name ..................................................................................................118
Setting the Date and Time ............................................................................................118
Making Network Settings ..............................................................................................118
Making Connection Settings .........................................................................................121
Setting the MCU ...........................................................................................................124
Setting One-touch Connection Numbers ......................................................................127
Making Screen Standby Settings .................................................................................127
Making Sound Settings ................................................................................................127
Setting the MIC Position ...............................................................................................128
Making Remote Control Settings ..................................................................................130
Changing Video Camera Settings ................................................................................131
Making Language Settings ...........................................................................................131
Making Recording Settings ..........................................................................................132
Using Multicast .............................................................................................................132
Setting the USB Device Mode ......................................................................................132
Display Unit Information ...............................................................................................133
Checking Enhanced Features ......................................................................................133
Performing a Network Test ...........................................................................................134

Table of Contents
Performing Self Diagnosis ............................................................................................134

Displaying the Licence Information ..............................................................................135
Displaying the End-User Licence Agreement ...............................................................135
Performing Remote Maintenance .................................................................................135
Making Administrator Menu Settings ..........................................................................136
Administrator Menu List ................................................................................................136
Making Administrator Password Settings .....................................................................140
Making Encryption Settings ..........................................................................................140
Making Software Update Settings ................................................................................141
Making Connection Mode Settings ...............................................................................142
Making NAT Settings ....................................................................................................142
Making Call Type Settings ............................................................................................143
Making SIP Settings .....................................................................................................144
Making H.323 Settings .................................................................................................145
Making Codec Settings ................................................................................................147
Making Security Settings ..............................................................................................147
Making Video Output Settings ......................................................................................150
Making Audio Input/Output Settings .............................................................................152
Making GUI Settings ....................................................................................................153
Making HDMI Settings ..................................................................................................154
Setting Power Management .........................................................................................154
Setting Shortcuts ..........................................................................................................155
Setting Local Site Selection ..........................................................................................156
Setting Multicast Tree ...................................................................................................156
Exporting Data ..............................................................................................................156
Importing Data ..............................................................................................................157
Activating Enhanced Features .....................................................................................158
Updating Software ........................................................................................................159
Initialising a Video Camera ...........................................................................................160
Performing System Initialisation ...................................................................................160
Setting Remote Access ................................................................................................161
Using the KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service ................................163
Using the KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service .........................................................163
Preparations for Connections .......................................................................................163
KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service Setup Procedure ..............................................163
Connect to the Internet .................................................................................................165
Obtain a Registration Key ............................................................................................165
To check the MPR ID (using the unit) ........................................................................165
To obtain a Registration Key (using a computer) ......................................................166
To display the Registration Key again (using a computer) ........................................167
Using Mobile Connection Enhanced Features ..................................171
Using Mobile Connection Enhanced Features ...........................................................171
Using Multicast .....................................................................................172
Using Multicast ..............................................................................................................172
About Multicast .............................................................................................................172
Multicast Operation ......................................................................................................173
Starting Multicast .......................................................................................................173
Ending the Multicast ..................................................................................................173
Handling of Trouble During a Multicast .....................................................................173
The Multicast Tree .........................................................................................................174
About the Network ........................................................................................................174
Setting the System ........................................................................................................175

Table of Contents
Setting Multicast ...........................................................................................................175

Making Administrator Menu Settings ..........................................................................175
Registering the Multicast Tree ......................................................................................175
Starting a Multicast .......................................................................................................179
Starting a Multicast .......................................................................................................179
Starting a Multicast by Selecting the Multicast Target ..................................................179
Confirming the Transmission Status During a Multicast (Multicast Terminal) ..............181
Confirming the Transmission Status During a Multicast (Relay Terminal/Receiver
Terminal) ......................................................................................................................182
Starting and Stopping Recording During a Multicast ....................................................182
Using USB Recording Features ..........................................................183
Using USB Recording Features ...................................................................................183
Using USB Device Mode ......................................................................186
Using USB Device Mode ...............................................................................................186
Miscellaneous .......................................................................................188
Changing the Remote Control Batteries .....................................................................188
Cleaning the Unit ...........................................................................................................189
Input ......................................................................................................190
Inputting Letters and Numbers ....................................................................................190
Additional Information .........................................................................203
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................203
Basic Operation ............................................................................................................203
Audio ............................................................................................................................209
System Settings ...........................................................................................................211
If These Messages Appear ..........................................................................................211
Registration Page of KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service ........................................218
KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service for this Device ..................................................219
If a message from the KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service is displayed ..................220
Specifications .......................................................................................222
System Specifications ..................................................................................................222
Index............................................................................................................225

For Your Safety
For Your Safety
CAUTION:
For Your Safety • Before attempting to connect or operate this
product, please read the label on the bottom.
CAUTION
• Be sure to use the specified type of batteries only.
• Ensure that batteries are installed with correct
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK polarity. Incorrectly installed batteries can burst or
DO NOT OPEN leak, resulting in spillage or injuries.
• This product contains batteries. Replace only with
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, the same or equivalent type. Improper use or
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
replacement may cause overheating, rupture or
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. explosion resulting in injury or fire. Dispose of used
batteries according to the instructions of your local
solid waste officials and local regulations.
The lightning flash with arrowhead • When replacing the batteries for the remote control,
symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is use R6 (AA) type dry cell.
intended to alert the user to the presence
of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within For use only with power supply Panasonic,
the product’s enclosure that may be of PGLV1006. (KX-VC1000/KX-VC1300/KX-VC1600/
sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of KX-VC1000SX/KX-VC1300SX/KX-VC1600SX)
electric shock to persons. For use only with power supply Panasonic,
The exclamation point within an PGLV1011. (KX-VC1300A/KX-VC1600A)
equilateral triangle is intended to alert the For use only with power supply Panasonic,
user to the presence of important PGLV1017. (KX-VC2000/KX-VC2000SX)
operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature UL listed model No.:
accompanying the appliance. KX-VC1300A/KX-VC1600A/
KX-VC1000/KX-VC1300/KX-VC1600/KX-VC2000
WARNING:
• The mains plug or an appliance coupler shall Important Safety Instructions:
remain readily operable. 1) Read these instructions.
• To prevent fire or electric shock hazard, do not
expose this apparatus to rain or moisture. 2) Keep these instructions.
• The apparatus should not be exposed to dripping or 3) Heed all warnings.
splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as
vases, should be placed on the apparatus. 4) Follow all instructions.
• All work related to the installation of this product 5) Do not use this apparatus near water.
should be made by qualified service personnel or
system installers. 6) Clean only with dry cloth.
• The connections should comply with local electrical 7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install
code. in accordance with the manufacturer’s
• Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall instructions.
not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine,
fire or the like. 8) Do not install near any heat sources such as
• This is a class A product. In a domestic environment radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
this product may cause radio interference in which apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce
case the user may be required to take adequate heat.
measures. 9) Protect the power cord from being walked on
• This equipment is compliant with Class A of CISPR or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience
32. In a residential environment this equipment may receptacles, and the point where they exit
cause radio interference. from the apparatus.
• Do not use your headset at a high volume. The use
10) Only use attachments/accessories specified
of excessive sound volume through a headset may
by the manufacturer.
cause hearing loss.

For Your Safety
11) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms

or when unused for long periods of time.
12) Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel. Servicing is required when the
apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is
damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus
has been exposed to rain or moisture, does
not operate normally, or has been dropped.

Before Operation
Before Operation
10. Avoid placing the device in areas with high

Notes about Operation humidity, and exposing it to rain.
Please pay attention to the following points when using Neither the main unit nor the power plug is water
this device: resistant.
1. Please contact your dealer for installing,
upgrading, or repairing this device. 11. The power outlet should be near the product
and easily accessible.
2. Do not forcefully hit or shake this device.
Dropping or bumping this device can damage or
break this device.
About the Operating Environment
This device includes a feature that automatically adjusts
3. Do not place this device in a freezer or other voice transmissions to improve clarity. After beginning
location where it is exposed to cold a video conference call, adjustments to the call
temperatures. environment may not complete immediately, and as a
Doing so may result in damage or malfunctions. result voices may cut out or echo. In such cases, at the
beginning of the video conference call, be sure to speak
4. Place this device at least 2 m (6.5 ft) away from in turn with other parties.
radios, office equipment, microwave ovens, air
conditioning units, etc.
Noise from electronic devices can cause static and About Moving the Device
interference in other devices. Do not move this device while cords are still connected.
Doing so may result in damage to the cords.
5. Do not place this device in a location where it is
exposed to hydrogen sulfide, phosphorous,
ammonia, sulfur, carbon, acid, dirt, toxic gas, Other
etc.
• The unit may not operate in the event of a power
Doing so may result in damage, and the usable
failure.
life-span of the device may decrease.
• After unpacking the product, dispose of the power
plug cap and packing materials appropriately.
6. Do not apply insecticides or other volatile
liquids to the device, nor leave rubber bands or
vinyl objects on the device for extended periods
of time.
Doing so may result in alterations to the material or
paint peeling off the device.
7. Do not bring cards with magnetic strips, such

as credit cards and telephone cards, near the
microphone.
Cards might become unusable.
8. Do not bring the device near items that emit

electromagnetic waves or that are magnetised
(high-frequency sewing machines, electric
welders, magnets, etc.).
Doing so may result in static noise or damage.
9. Keep the device at least 10 cm (4 in) away from

all walls.
If placed against a wall, the device may not be able
to ventilate properly, which may lead to a system
malfunction due to overheating.

Before Operation
Data Security Privacy and Right of

We recommend observing the security precautions
described in this section, in order to prevent the
Publicity
disclosure of sensitive information. By installing and using this device, you are responsible
Panasonic is not responsible for any damages for maintaining the privacy and usage rights of images
caused by improper use of this device. and other data (including sound picked up by the
microphone). Use this device accordingly.
Preventing Data Loss • Privacy is generally said to be, "A legal guarantee
Keep a separate record of the encryption key and all and right not to have the details of one’s personal
information stored in the contact list. life unreasonably publicised, and the right to be able
to control information about oneself. In addition,
right of publicity is a right not to have a likeness of
Preventing Data Disclosure one’s face or figure photographed and publicised
without consent".
• Do not place this device in a location that can be • When Automatic Answer or Forced Answering is
accessed or removed without authorisation. set as an answer method for incoming calls,
• If important information is saved on this device, transmission begins as soon as a video conference
store it in an appropriate location. call is received (Page 121). The receiver of the
• Do not store sensitive personal information in the video conference call will begin transmitting as soon
unit. as the video conference call is received at any time,
• In the following situations, make a record of the from any caller. Please be aware when the
encryption key and the information stored in the Automatic Answer feature or Forced Answering
contact list and return the unit to the state it was in feature is enabled, there is a risk that due to an
when purchased. unexpected, automatically answered video
– Before lending or disposing of the unit conference call, privacy rights may be violated or
– Before handing the unit over to a third party sensitive information may be transmitted to
– Before having the unit serviced unauthorised parties.
• Make sure the unit is serviced by only a certified
technician.
This device can register and store personal data (the
contact list, encryption key, connection history, etc.). In
order to prevent the disclosure of data stored on this
device, make sure to delete all data that is registered
and stored on this device prior to disposing of, lending,
or returning this device.
Preventing Data Disclosure over the

Network
• To ensure the security of private conversations,
only connect the unit to a secure network.
• To prevent unauthorised access, only connect the
unit to a network that is properly managed.
• Make sure all computers connected to the unit
employ up-to-date security measures.
• To prevent illegal access from the Internet, activate
a Firewall.

Precaution
Precaution
For users in the European Union only

Precaution
For users in the United Kingdom Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries
Only for European Union and countries with
FOR YOUR SAFETY, PLEASE READ THE
recycling systems
FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.
These symbols on the products, packaging,
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three-pin and/or accompanying documents mean that
mains plug for your safety and convenience. Should the used electrical and electronic products and
fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the batteries must not be mixed with general
replacement fuse is of the same rating and that it is household waste.
approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362. For proper treatment, recovery and
recycling of old products and used batteries,
Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on
please take them to applicable collection
the body of the fuse. points in accordance with your national
legislation.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must By disposing of them correctly, you will help
ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you to save valuable resources and prevent any
lose the fuse cover, the plug must not be used until a potential negative effects on human health
replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse and the environment.
cover can be purchased from your local Panasonic For more information about collection and
dealer. recycling, please contact your local
municipality.
IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE Penalties may be applicable for incorrect
FOR THE AC OUTLET IN YOUR PREMISES, THEN disposal of this waste, in accordance with
THE FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG national legislation.
CUT OFF AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY. THERE IS A
For business users in the European
DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE
Union
CUT-OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMP
If you wish to discard electrical and
SOCKET.
electronic equipment, please contact your
dealer or supplier for further information.
How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment
with a screwdriver and replace the fuse and fuse cover. Information on disposal in other
countries outside the European Union
These symbols are only valid in the
European Union. If you wish to discard these
items, please contact your local authorities
or dealer and ask for the correct method of
disposal.
Note for the battery symbol
(bottom symbol)
This symbol might be used in combination
with a chemical symbol. In this case it
complies with the requirement set by the
Directive for the chemical involved.

Precaution
For users in Taiwan only For Canada

CAN ICES-3(A)/NMB-3(A)
Notice
• This product contains a CR coin lithium battery. For U.S.A.
When disposing of the product, the battery must This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery
be removed. Contact your dealer for details. which contains Perchlorate Material - special handling
may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
FCC Note: This equipment has been tested and found

to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in
a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
Direct current symbol installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
Alternating current symbol communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference
This symbol indicates a warning in which case the user will be required to correct the
symbol could get hot and there is interference at his own expense.
a possible RISK of a burn if
touched. FCC Caution: To assure continued compliance,
(example - use only shielded interface cables when
We declare under our sole responsibility that the connecting to other devices). Any changes or
product to which this declaration relates is in modifications not expressly approved by the party
conformity with the standards or other normative responsible for compliance could void the user’s
documents following the provisions of Directives authority to operate this equipment.
2006/95/EC and 2004/108/EC.
The model number and serial number of this product
may be found on the surface of the unit. You should note
the model number and serial number of this unit in the
For Malaysia Battery Regulation space provided and retain this book as a permanent
Panasonic Malaysia Sdn. Bhd. record of your purchase to aid identification in the event
Lot 10, Jalan 13/2, 46200 Petaling Jaya, Selangor of theft.
Darul Ehsan, Malaysia
Model No.
Serial No.
For users in Germany only
• Machine Noise Information Ordinance, 3rd
GPSGV: The highest sound pressure level is 70 dB Disposal may be regulated in your community due to
(A) or less according to EN ISO 7779. environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling
• This equipment is not for use at video display work information, please visit Panasonic website: http://
stations according to BildscharbV. www.panasonic.com/environmental or call
1-888-769-0149.

Preparation
Preparation
Accessory/Optional Accessory Information

The following accessories are included:
Included Accessories
Accessories Quantity
AC adaptor
Part No.:PGLV1006 (KX-VC1000/KX-VC1300/KX-VC1600/
KX-VC1000SX/KX-VC1300SX/KX-VC1600SX) 1
Part No.:PGLV1011 (KX-VC1300A/KX-VC1600A)
Part No.:PGLV1017 (KX-VC2000/KX-VC2000SX)
Power cord Depends on country/area
Remote control
Part No.:N2QAYB001001 (KX-VC1000SX/KX-VC1300SX/
KX-VC1600SX/KX-VC2000SX/KX-VC1300A/KX-VC1600A) 1
Part No.:PGVF2294ZAV1 (KX-VC1000/KX-VC1300/KX-VC1600/
KX-VC2000)
Batteries (R6 [AA] dry cell) 2
Note
• The number and type of power cords may vary depending on the country/area of use. Please use
whichever is appropriate for the country/area.

Preparation
Optional Accessory
The following products are available as optional accessories.
Proprietary main video camera

Proprietary main video camera Proprietary main video camera
12x optical/10x digital zoom 12x optical/10x digital zoom
Pan/tilt function supported Pan/tilt function supported
Model No.: KX-VD170 Model No.: GP-VD151

Proprietary main video camera
3x optical/4x digital zoom
Pan/tilt function supported
Model No.: GP-VD131

Preparation
Boundary Microphone
Boundary Microphone Boundary Microphone
(Digital Interface Type) (Analogue Interface Type)
(Proprietary cable included. (Proprietary cable included.
Cable length: approx. 8.5 m [28 ft]) Cable length: approx. 7 m [23 ft])
Model No.: KX-VCA001 Model No.: KX-VCA002

Preparation
Activation Keys
You can enhance the following types of features with an activation key. For details about the settings, refer to
"Activating Enhanced Features" (Page 158).
Activation
Model No. Product Name Target Model Description
Key Type
KX-VC1000 Enables the multicast
Activation Key KX-VC1300 feature.
KX-VCS302 Multicast
(Multicast) KX-VC1600
KX-VC2000
Enables the feature
for making
multiple-party video
Activation Key (4 Point 4 Point conference calls with
KX-VCS304 KX-VC1600
Built-in MCU) Built-in MCU 10 parties, rather
than the default
maximum of 6
parties.
Enables the feature
for making
multiple-party video
Activation Key (4 Point
4 Point conference calls with
KX-VCS305 Built-in MCU for KX-VC2000
Built-in MCU 20 or 24 parties,
KX-VC2000)
rather than the
default maximum of
16 parties.
Can establish
Activation Key (4 Point
4 Point connections with a
KX-VCS314 Built-in MCU for KX-VC1000
Built-in MCU maximum of 4
KX-VC1000)
parties.
KX-VC1000 Connects to a mobile
Activation Key (Mobile Mobile
KX-VCS351 KX-VC1300 device in IP Mode.
Connection) Connection
KX-VC1600
Activation Key (Mobile Connects to a mobile
Mobile
KX-VCS352 Connection for KX-VC2000 device in IP Mode.
Connection
KX-VC2000)
Activation Key (HDMI for Enables HDMI2
HDMI Dual
KX-VCS402 KX-VC1000 Dual KX-VC1000 output.
Monitor
Monitor)
KX-VC1000 Extends the service
NAT
Activation Key (NAT KX-VC1300 period of KX-VC
KX-VCS701 Traversal 1
Traversal 1 Year) KX-VC1600 Series NAT Traversal
Year
KX-VC2000 Service.
KX-VC1000 Extends the service
NAT
Activation Key (NAT KX-VC1300 period of KX-VC
KX-VCS703 Traversal 3
Traversal 3 Years) KX-VC1600 Series NAT Traversal
Years
KX-VC2000 Service.

Preparation
Activation
Model No. Product Name Target Model Description
Key Type
KX-VC1000 Enables the USB
PC KX-VC1300 Device Mode feature.
KX-VCZ501 PC Peripheral kit
Peripheral KX-VC1600
KX-VC2000

Preparation
Part Names and Usage
Main Unit (Front)
A B C
D E
Power LED
Shows the power status. The LED is green or red when power is being supplied from the AC adaptor, and
off when power is not being supplied.
Remote Control Signal Receiver
Receives Remote Control signals. The maximum range of reception is approximately 8 m (26.2 ft) from
front of the unit, and approximately 3 m (9.8 ft) from 20° on each side, total 40°.
Headset Input-Output Terminal
Used to connect a headset to the unit (Page 34).
Note
• If a headset is connected, audio from the other party can be heard through the headset. Audio is
not played through the display or speakers. However, if "Output local site sound" is set to
"HDMI", audio is output via HDMI, not the headset (Page 152).
• If a headset is connected, how audio is sent to the other party differs depending on the type of
devices connected as follows:
Connected Device Audio Sent to Other Party
Boundary Microphone Audio is picked up only by the headset microphone. Audio

is not picked up by the Boundary Microphones.
General-purpose microphone Both the general-purpose microphones and the headset
microphone pick up audio.
Boundary Microphone and Both the general-purpose microphones and the headset
general-purpose microphone microphone pick up audio. The Boundary Microphones do
not pick up audio.
Power button
Turns the power on and off (Page 40).
Status LED
Shows the operational status of the unit (Page 27).

Preparation
Main Unit (Back)

KX-VC1600/KX-VC2000
A B C D E F G H I J
K L M N O P Q R S T U
KX-VC1300
A B C D E F G I J
K M N O P Q R T U
KX-VC1000
A B C E F G I J
K M N O P Q R T U
Camera Control terminal

Not used.
RS-232C terminal
Normally not used. Used to connect a computer for maintenance.
USB jack (Page 156, Page 159, Page 183, Page 186)
Used to connect a USB memory device to save the operation log, save recorded movies, and update the
software, or used for USB Device Mode.
MIC (Digital) jack (Except KX-VC1000) (Page 30)
Used to connect the Digital Boundary Microphone (optional) (Page 19).
MIC (Analog) jack (Page 30)
Used to connect the Analogue Boundary Microphone (optional) (Page 19).
Audio In L/R jack (Page 31)
Used to connect general-purpose microphones (not for the Boundary Microphone).
Audio Out L/R jack
Used to connect an amplifier or active speaker (Page 35). Also used to connect the speakers of a display
without an HDMI terminal for audio output (Page 36).

Preparation
Component terminal (KX-VC1600/KX-VC2000) (Page 36)

Used to connect to the display with a component video cable.
Functional Earth terminal
Used to connect an earthing wire for when there is a lot of noise over the connection.
Video Switch
Used to set the unit’s video frequency. Sets the unit’s video frequency to be the same as the connected
device.
LAN1 jack (Page 31)
Connect a LAN cable.
LAN2 jack (KX-VC1600/KX-VC2000) (Page 31)
Connect a LAN cable (Used when connecting to a network other than LAN1).
RGB terminal (Page 34)
Used to connect a computer for sending screens to participants.
HDMI terminal (Page 34)
Used to connect a computer for sending screens to participants.
Sub Camera terminal (Page 34)
Used to connect a second, sub video camera with an HDMI cable for sharing video contents apart from
the main video camera.
Main Camera terminal (Page 30)
Connect the main video camera with an HDMI cable.
HDMI1 terminal (Page 30)
Used to connect to the display with an HDMI cable.
HDMI2 terminal (Page 30)
Used to connect to the display with an HDMI cable. Settings are required to use the HDMI2 terminal
(Page 150). When using the KX-VC1000, after using an activation key to enable HDMI Dual Monitor
support, remove the protective seal (Page 20).
HDMI3 terminal (KX-VC1600/KX-VC2000) (Page 30)
Used to connect to the display or a video recorder with an HDMI cable. Used to switch the displayed image
between your image and recorded video.
DC IN (Page 31)
Connect the AC adaptor’s DC cord.
Hook
Used to prevent the DC IN connection from becoming unplugged.

Preparation
Remote Control
L
M
A
N
B
C O
D
E P
Q
F
G R
H
S
I
T
J
Press to enter screen standby mode (Page 27). The power of the unit can be turned on/off by pressing
and holding (for 1 second). During communication, the power of the main unit cannot be turned off.
Press to show your computer’s screen on your and the other party’s display during a video conference call.
When not on a video conference call, the computer screen is shown on your display only (Page 89).
Press to display the Menu screen (Page 44).
Press to show the sub video camera’s images on your and the other party’s display during a video
conference call. When not on a video conference call, the sub video camera’s images are shown on your
display only (Page 89).
Press to display the Home screen (Page 41).
Press to move the cursor, control the PT (Pan/Tilt) of a video camera, and select items.
Press to make or manually answer video conference calls (Page 51, Page 63).
Press to select the feature assigned to each colour. Available features are displayed in the guide area
(Page 43).
Press to adjust the volume during a video conference call. Press [+] to increase and [–] to decrease the
volume (Page 85).
Press to mute the microphone during a video conference call, so that the other party cannot hear your
voice (Page 86).
Press to dial or perform settings where inputting digits/characters is required (Page 190).
Press to display the connection status of the network and peripheral devices (Page 103).
Press to show/hide on-screen information, such as the guide area, on the Home screen and the video
conference call screen (Page 45).
Press to change the layout of the screen during a video conference call (Page 71).
Press to return to the main video camera after showing images from a computer or sub video camera
(Page 89).

Preparation
Press to return to the previous screen.

Press to confirm the selected item or entered information.
Press to end a video conference call.
Press to display the camera control screen (Page 93).
Press for zoom control (zoom in/out) of the video camera either at your end or the other party’s end
(Page 92).

Preparation
LED Indication
LEDs indicate the operational status of the unit, as follows:
Power
Status LED Status
LED
Off • AC power: OFF (Without power supplied
Off
from the AC adaptor)
Red on Off • AC power: ON (Power button: OFF)
Green Blue flashing • Starting up
flashing
Red Off • A hardware fault has occurred.
flashing
Blue flashing • Startup state
Green on
• Idle state
Green on Blue on • In a video conference call
Green on Yellow on • Self diagnosis is being performed.
Red on • An error has occurred.
Green on • Maintenance is being performed.
• Software update in progress
Green on Red flashing • A serious error has occurred.
Red flashing • The CPU cooling fan has stopped
Red on
(KX-VC2000 only).
Green on Off • In screen standby mode
Screen Standby
When there is no video conference call transmission, and the remote control is not operated for more than 10
minutes (default), or when the remote control’s [STANDBY] button is pressed, the unit enters screen standby
mode. Video out to the display is suspended and the status LED turns off.
Screen standby mode ends when the remote control is operated, or when a video conference call is received.
Notice
• If screen standby mode ends and no image is visible, check to see if the display or video camera’s
power saving settings are enabled. Check each device’s manual for more information about its power
saving settings.
Note
• You can change the length of time until the unit enters screen standby mode (Page 127).
• The unit will not enter screen standby mode while displaying a computer’s screen or a sub video
camera’s image, even if the remote control is not operated for a period of time.
• When the remote control is operated and screen standby mode ends, the Home screen will be
displayed.
• If a button is pressed on the remote control to end screen standby mode, that button’s operation is not
performed in that case.
• If screen standby mode begins while editing information in the contact list or other screen, any unsaved
changes will be lost.

Preparation
• It takes about 7 seconds to return from screen standby mode. (The length of time may vary depending
on the type of display you are using.)
• The unit will not enter screen standby mode during USB recording and USB Device Mode.

Preparation
Stereo pin plug cable (for connecting a

Connection and general-purpose microphone/amplifier/active
speaker/display [without an HDMI terminal and with
Preparation speakers]):
RCA plug
Device and Network Connection

Network Environment
In addition to the unit, you will need a video camera, a
display, a microphone (Boundary Microphone or When using the unit over the Internet, a broadband
general-purpose microphone) and connection cables connection is required.
for visual communication.
Apart from the Boundary Microphone, the other devices
must meet the following conditions:
Device Condition
Video HDMI output required (resolution:

Camera 1080p/1080i/720p)
Display*1 HDMI/component input required
Make sure that the video
frequencies of the unit and display
match.
General- Line level output required (In case of
purpose microphone level output,
microphone microphone amplifier also required)
*1
If displays are connected using both the HDMI terminal and
Component terminal, connect to displays that have the same
resolution (Page 151).
Cables
Prepare the following commercially available cables:
HDMI cable:
Category 2 (high speed) recommended
Note
• Use cables with the HDMI logo (certified
HDMI cables) for HDMI connection. Using
non-certified cables may adversely affect
operation. Use HDMI cables with secure
connectors.
LAN cable:
1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T (full duplex)
Category 5 or greater
VGA cable (for computer connection when using
the secondary video source):
15-pin mini D-Sub
Note
• Ensure that the cables match the sockets of
both the unit and your computer.

Preparation
Notice
Connecting the Unit
• Use only the included power cord.
This section describes how to connect the main video
camera, display, microphone, LAN cable, AC adaptor Note
and power cord. • Make sure to read the instruction manuals for
all devices being connected.
1. Connect the main video camera.
• Connect the main video camera to the Main
Camera terminal on the back of the unit using
an HDMI cable (A).
2. Connect the display.

C D E • Connect the display to the HDMI 1-3 terminals
on the back of the unit using an HDMI cable
(B).
Note
To each To a general - purpose • The HDMI3 terminal on the back of the unit
device microphone switches between output of your own image
and recorded images. When recording,
connect the recording device to the HDMI3
terminal, and set the output to that for
recording (Page 151).
• If your display is not compatible with HDMI,
use a component cable. Since sound
signals are not transmitted when using a
component cable, connect an amplifier/
active speaker, or use the display’s
speakers.
F • If "game mode" can be selected in the
display’s settings, set "game mode". It may
improve voice delay.
To a router
3. Connect a microphone.
Digital Boundary Microphone (optional)

Connect the Digital Boundary Microphone to the
MIC (Digital) jack on the back of the unit using the
proprietary cable (C).
• Use only the included cable.
A • Push and turn the connector of the proprietary
cable until it clicks. If the connector does not
click, try reconnecting the cable with the top and
B
bottom of the connector reversed.
G
To each To a display Analogue Boundary Microphone (optional)
device Connect the Analogue Boundary Microphone to the
MIC (Analog) jack on the back of the unit using the
proprietary cable (D).
To an AC outlet
• Use only the included cable.
• Ensure that the arrow on the connector of the
proprietary cable is facing up when you insert

Preparation
the cable. When you disconnect the cable, grip System Layout Examples
the connector securely and pull it out.
Display and Main Video Camera
General-purpose microphone Place the display and main video camera at the same
Connect the microphone to the Audio In L/R jack on side of the room.
the back of the unit using the stereo pin plug cable
(E) after amplifying the signal to line level using a
device such as a microphone amplifier.
• Connect the microphone correctly, as follows:
– Left channel ® L
– Right channel ® R
Note
• When connecting both the Boundary
Microphone and a general-purpose
microphone, both microphones can be used
simultaneously.
• When connecting a headset, refer to
"Headset Connection (Page 34)".
4. Connect to the network.

• Connect a hub/router to the LAN jack on the
back of the unit using a category 5 or greater
LAN cable (F).
Note
• Set the hub/router to Auto Negotiation
Note
mode.
• Do not connect to a hub/router set to Half • If you use speakers, refer to "Amplifier/Active
Duplex. Speaker Connection" (Page 35).
• For more details about routers and DCEs,
Digital Boundary Microphones
refer to the documentation for each device.
Up to 4 Digital Boundary Microphones can be
connected in cascade. There are no separate terminals
5. Connect the power cord to the AC adaptor. for input and output on the Boundary Microphones.
• Use only the power cord included with the unit. Also, an Analogue Boundary Microphone and
general-purpose microphones can be used
6. Insert the AC adaptor’s DC cord (G) into the DC IN simultaneously.
terminal on the back of the unit.
• Use only the AC adaptor included with the unit.
• Wrap the DC cord around the hook to prevent it
from being disconnected.
7. Plug in the power cord into the power outlet.

• Choose an outlet that is convenient for
plugging/unplugging.
Note
• Make sure that the microphones are placed at
least 1 m (3.3 ft) away from the display and
speakers.

Preparation
• Do not connect more than 4 Digital Boundary Layout examples (a regular room)
Microphones. Doing so will cause all Digital (the grey circle indicates the microphone’s range):
Boundary Microphones to stop working. If an
Analogue Boundary Microphone is also
connected, all audio input from the Analogue
Boundary Microphone will also stop working.
Display
• If both of the following conditions are met, the
output sent to the other party will be stereo;
otherwise, monaural: 4m
(13.1 ft)
– The bandwidth is higher than approximately Microphone
1.8 Mbps in a 2-party video conference call
with the HD Visual Communication Unit.
– The MIC position is set automatically or
manually to collect a sound in stereo.
• If a headset is connected, audio from the
headset microphone is given priority, and audio
from Digital Boundary Microphones is no longer
picked up.
The range of each microphone (the radius of the circle

with a microphone at the centre) varies according to the Display
level of surrounding and the number of microphones
being used. Place microphones accordingly, referring
4m 4m
to the following table. (13.1 ft) (13.1 ft)
Microphone Microphone
Noise
A quiet A regular A noisy
level/
room (40 room (45 room (50
Micro–
dBsplA) dBsplA) dBsplA)
phone
approx. approx. approx.
3m 2.2 m 1.2 m
1
(approx. (approx. (approx.
9.8 ft) 7.2 ft) 3.9 ft)
2.8 m 1.5 m 1m 4m Display
2 (13.1 ft)
4m Microphone
9.2 ft) 4.9 ft) 3.3 ft) (13.1 ft)
approx. approx.
2.3 m 1.3 m Microphone
3 — 4m
(approx. (approx. (13.1 ft)
7.5 ft) 4.3 ft) Microphone
approx. approx.
2m 1.1 m
4 —
(approx. (approx.
6.5 ft) 3.6 ft)

Preparation
Noise A quiet A regular A noisy

level/ room room room
4m 4m Micro– (40 (45 (50
(13.1 ft) (13.1 ft) phone dBsplA) dBsplA) dBsplA)
Display
2m 1.5 m 1m
1
6.5 ft) 4.9 ft) 3.3 ft)
4m 4m
(13.1 ft) (13.1 ft)
Analogue Boundary Microphones

You can connect 1 Analogue Boundary Microphone.
Together with Digital Boundary Microphones, up to 5
boundary microphones can be connected.
Note
• Make sure that the microphone is placed at
least 1 m (3.3 ft) away from the display and
speakers.
• Make sure that the microphone is placed with
its connector facing the display.
• If both of the following conditions are met, the
output sent to the other party will be stereo;
otherwise, monaural:
– The bandwidth is higher than approximately
1.8 Mbps in a 2-party video conference call
with the HD Visual Communication Unit.
– You are not using Digital Boundary
Microphones and an Analogue Boundary
Microphone together.
• If a headset is connected, audio from the
from Analogue Boundary Microphones is no
longer picked up.
The range of the microphone (the radius of the circle

with a microphone at the centre) varies according to the
level of surrounding noise. Place the microphone
accordingly, referring to the following table.

Preparation
Headset Connection Sub Video Camera Connection

You can connect a headset to the headset jack on the This section describes how to connect a sub video
front of the unit. camera. You can transmit images taken with the sub
video camera to all parties.
A 1. Connect the sub video camera.
B • Connect the sub video camera to the Sub
Camera terminal on the back of the unit using
an HDMI cable.
Headset
Note
• Check the headphone connector (A) and the
microphone connector (B), and then connect
the headset. Note
• If a Boundary Microphone and a headset are
• You can connect/disconnect the sub video
connected at the same time, audio from the
camera during a video conference call.
from Boundary Microphones is no longer picked
up.
• If a general-purpose microphone and a headset
Computer Connection
are connected at the same time, audio from This section describes how to connect a computer.
both sources is picked up. Connecting a computer allows you to show the
• If a headset is connected, audio will not be computer screen’s images on the display and transmit
played through the display or speakers. them to other parties.
• When using HDMI3 as a video/audio recording You can transmit the computer’s images to all parties.
terminal, audio will be output even when a 1. Connect the computer.
headset is connected. (KX-VC1600/ • Connect the computer to the HDMI terminal on
KX-VC2000) the back of the unit using an HDMI cable.
• For 3-conductor stereo mini-plugs only.

Preparation
• For computers without HDMI ports, connect the Amplifier/Active Speaker

computer to the RGB terminal on the back of the
unit using a VGA cable.
Connection
This section describes how to connect an amplifier/
active speaker.
Note
• You can connect/disconnect the computer 1. Connect the amplifier/active speaker to the Audio
during a video conference call. Out L/R jack on the back of the unit using a stereo
• One of the following resolutions is required pin plug cable.
for transmitting computer images: VGA
Note
(640 ´ 480), SVGA (800 ´ 600), XGA
(1024 ´ 768), HD (1280 ´ 720), WXGA • Connect the amplifier/active speaker
(1280 ´ 768, 1280 ´ 800), SXGA correctly, as follows:
(1280 ´ 1024), FWXGA (1360 ´ 768, – Left channel ® L
1366 ´ 768), WXGA+ (1440 ´ 900), WXGA – Right channel ® R
++ (1600 ´ 900), UXGA (1600 ´ 1200), • For more details about the amplifier or
WSXGA + (1680 ´ 1050), Full-HD active speaker, refer to the documentation
(1920 ´ 1080). for the corresponding device.
• If both HDMI and VGA cables are
connected to the unit, the image of the Layout example:
computer connected using an HDMI cable Place the speakers either side of the display, as follows:
will be displayed.
Speaker
Display
Main
Microphone video
camera
Speaker
Notice
• Place the speakers either side of the display. If
you place the display at the front of the room
and the speakers at the back, the microphone’s
left/right spatial direction may be reversed, and
the orientation of the image and sound will not
match on the other party’s side.

Preparation
Connecting the Display with a

Component Cable
If your display does not have an HDMI terminal, use a
component cable for connection.
1. Connect the display to the Component terminal on

the back of the unit using a component cable.
Note
• To use the display’s speakers to output audio,
connect the display to the Audio Out L/R jack
(Page 23) on the back of the unit using a stereo
pin plug cable.
• If displays are connected using both the HDMI
terminal and Component terminal, connect to
displays that have the same resolution.

Preparation
Network Configuration Example

Diagram (when using the Internet/KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service)
Compatible with LAN1
KX-VC Series NAT

Traversal Service
Router
LAN1
Internet
Router
Router

Preparation
Diagram (when using an intranet/KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service)

Compatible with LAN1 and LAN2 (KX-VC1600/KX-VC2000)
Intranet
Router
KX-VC Series
NAT Traversal
Service
LAN2 LAN1
Internet
Router
Router
Note
When using a dual network (LAN1 and LAN2)
• Use LAN1 when using KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service.
• The default gateway is in LAN1.
• NAT or DHCP can be used only in LAN1.

Preparation
Preparing the Remote Control

Inserting Batteries
1. Open the cover.
2. Insert batteries (R6 [AA] dry cell), minus side first, then close the cover.

Preparation
Turning the Power On/Off

Note
• Make sure that peripheral devices (e.g., display, main video camera) are turned on.
• When you turn the power on for the first time, the Initial Settings screen is displayed (Page 48).
• If the power is turned off by pulling out the AC adaptor when the Power LED is green, when the AC
adaptor is inserted and power is supplied again, the status will go back that of when the power is turned
on (the Power LED is green).
• The power can be turned on or off automatically (Page 154).
1 Press the Power button on the front of the unit or on the
remote control for more than 1 second. (Both can turn 1
the power on or off.)
• When the power is turned on, the Power LED starts
flashing green. Then, the Power LED becomes
green, the Status LED starts flashing blue slowly,
and the Home screen is displayed.
• When the power is turned off, the Power LED

becomes red.

Preparation
Screen Display
Home Screen (Idle Screen)

Displayed when the power is turned on. Also displayed when the [Home] button is pressed on the remote
control.
A
C
G
F D
Main Video Camera Image

Displays the video from the main video camera.
Unit Information
The information displayed differs depending on the selected connection mode (Page 142).
IP Mode: The connection mode, local site name, the SIP user name (if using a SIP server)/H.323 extension,
H.323 name (if using a gatekeeper), LAN1 IP address, LAN2 IP address (KX-VC1600/KX-VC2000),
maximum bandwidth, encryption status indication icons, Static NAT status indication icon (if using the Static
NAT feature), Local Camera Display of MCU Site icon, Profile standby icon, and Incoming Call from a
non-regist. icon.
NAT Traversal Mode: The connection mode, local site name, Terminal ID, maximum bandwidth, encryption
status indication icons, Local Camera Display of MCU Site icon, Profile standby icon, and Incoming Call
from a non-regist. icon.
IP/NAT Traversal Mode: The connection mode, local site name, Terminal ID, LAN1 IP address, LAN2 IP
address (KX-VC1600/KX-VC2000), maximum bandwidth, encryption status indication icons, Static NAT
status indication icon (if using the Static NAT feature), Local Camera Display of MCU Site icon, Profile
standby icon, and Incoming Call from a non-regist. icon.
Note
• When selecting a local site (Page 113), the selected local site’s information is displayed. The local
site’s set device name is displayed. The information displayed differs depending on the local site’s
connection mode.
• If the local site name, SIP user name, H.323 extension, or H.323 name is too long to display, it will
be shortened and ended with "...".

Preparation
Encryption Status Indication Icons

The status of the encryption settings for SIP/H.323/NAT Traversal is indicated by icons. The icon changes
as follows:
Icon Status of Settings
When using IP mode: "SIP" is set to "ON" and "Encryption (SIP)" is set to
"ON".
When using NAT Traversal mode or IP/NAT Traversal mode: "Encryption

(SIP)" is set to "ON".
When using IP mode: "SIP" is set to "ON" and "Encryption (SIP)" is set to
"OFF".
When using NAT Traversal mode or IP/NAT Traversal mode: "Encryption

(SIP)" is set to "OFF".
"H.323" is set to "ON" and "Encryption (H.323)" is set to "Best effort".
"H.323" is set to "ON" and "Encryption (H.323)" is set to "ON".
"H.323" is set to "ON" and "Encryption (H.323)" is set to "OFF".
When using NAT Traversal mode or IP/NAT Traversal mode: "Encryption (NAT
Traversal)" is set to "ON".
When using NAT Traversal mode or IP/NAT Traversal mode: "Encryption (NAT
Traversal)" is set to "OFF".
Static NAT Status Indication Icon

When using IP mode, "Static NAT" is set to "ON".
Local Camera Display of MCU Site Icon

"Local Camera Display of MCU Site" is set to "OFF".

Preparation
Profile standby Icon

Profile standby is set (page 112).
Incoming Call from a non-regist. Icon

"Incoming Call from a non-regist." is set to "OFF" (page 147).
Group/Site
Displays the name/group name assigned to One-Touch Connection number 1 through 5. If the name is
too long to display, it will be shortened and ended with "...".
Remote Control ID
Displays the remote control ID of the unit when it is set (Page 130).
Shortcut key
Displays shortcut keys for accessing system settings (Page 155).
Status Indication
The status of the unit is indicated by icons.
Icon Status
Microphone is muted.
Network, server (any kind), or peripheral connection error (no connection, device error,
etc.).
Note
• If there are no connections, or there is a device error in other devices such as the
LAN cable, the icon will be displayed.
Note
• If you set "Active Home Menu" to "OFF" in the administrator menu, you can hide BCDE
(Page 153). When hidden, you can unhide them again by pressing [FULL SCREEN] on the remote
control.
Icon Display Area
The status of the unit is indicated by icons.
Icon Status
Displayed when recording (Page 82, Page 132).

Preparation
Menu Screen (Idle Screen)

Displayed when [MENU] is pressed on the remote control. Displays operations you can perform and settings
you can change.
B C
Menu List
Displays the various functions you can use and settings available to change.
Guide
Displays operations you can perform with the remote control when performing features or changing
settings.
Administrator login
Press [Y] to display the administrator login screen for performing administrator settings. Depending on the
settings, "Admin Login" can be hidden and [Y] can be disabled (page 154).

Preparation
Video Conference Call Screen

A B
F D
G E
Other party’s information

When using IP mode:
When registered in the contact list: The other party’s name/IP address is displayed.
When not registered in the contact list: The other party’s IP address, SIP URI (SIP user name@SIP domain
name), host name (e.g., hdvc.example.com), H.323 extension, H.323 name, MCU’s conference room
number@IP address, or MCU’s SIP user name@IP address is displayed. If the other party uses the same
SIP domain as you, only the SIP user name, and not the SIP URI, is displayed.
When using NAT Traversal Mode:

• When registered in the contact list: The other party’s name/connection number is displayed.
• When not registered in the contact list: The other party’s connection number is displayed.
Video Image
Displays the other party’s video, your own video, or video from the secondary video input such as a
computer display or a sub video camera.
Subscreen
Depending on the screen layout, your own video or the other party’s video is displayed here.
Duration
Displays the duration of the current video conference call.
Note
• 99h59m is displayed for the duration even if the length of the video conference call exceeds 100
hours.
Guide
Displays operations you can perform with the remote control.
Icon Display Area
Network Status Indication
The number of antennas in the icon indicates differing levels of network congestion.
The icon changes as follows:
0 bars ( ): The network is very congested or the bandwidth is insufficient at the connection point.
1 bar ( ): The network is congested.
2 bars ( ): The network is slightly congested.
3 bars ( ): The network is not congested.

Preparation
Note
• If the icon shows only 0–1 bars continuously, contact your network administrator.
• During multiple-party video conference calls, the icon is displayed on each site screen, but not on
your own image.
• You can set whether to display the icon. This setting affects all displayed images (excluding your
own image) (Page 123). For example, if icon display has been enabled, the icon will be displayed
on the image of all other parties, but not on your own image. However, if icon display has been
disabled, the icon will not be displayed on any of the images. Regardless of icon display settings,
the icon is not displayed while the combined computer/video feed screen is being displayed.
Other Site’s Audio Indication ( )

Displayed on the Main Site when "Other Site's Audio" is set to "Mute" during a multiple-party video
conference call using the built-in MCU (Page 81, Page 108).
Dialling Indication ( )
Displayed when a call is incoming at another site, such as when a site is added during a call or when a call
is made (Page 67).
Presentation Mode Indication ( )
Displayed for the main site for video conference calls with multiple connections that use an internal MCU
when MCU mode is Presentation Mode (Page 77, Page 108, Page 124).
Recording icon ( )
Displayed when recording (Page 82, Page 132).
Status Indication
The status of the unit is indicated by icons (Page 43).
Note
• Pressing [FULL SCREEN] on the remote control will hide or unhide the other party’s information,
duration, icon display area*1, and guide displays.
• If a black line is displayed on the left of a site in the dialogue box for site selection during a call, it
indicates that the site has the lowest bandwidth. If there are two types of communication groups due
to "Secondary Bandwidth Selection" (Page 126), a black line is displayed on the site with the lowest
bandwidth for each group.
Example: when Paris has the lowest bandwidth
*1
If the icons in the icon display area have been set to not be displayed, pressing [FULL SCREEN] will not show the icon.

Preparation
Entering characters
You can use the remote control to input letters and numbers.
• Note the following regarding entering the address of the other party.
– SIP user name/MCU’s conference room number: alphanumeric characters, symbols . = * + _ - $ ! ? /
( ) ' (up to 60 characters)
– H.323 name: alphanumeric characters, symbols . @ : ; = * + # _ - $ \ % ^ ! ? / ` ( ) [ ] {|} ' (up to 60
characters)
– SIP domain name: alphanumeric characters, symbols . - (up to 128 characters)
– H.323 extension: numeric characters, symbols * # (up to 20 characters)
• For host names in the format of user name@domain name, characters and the number of characters that
can be entered for user name and domain name are the same as for SIP user name and SIP domain name.
• The following characters can be used for input such as entering addresses in the contact list or directly
entering the address of the party to call.
– When using SIP: alphanumeric characters, symbols . @ : = * + _ - $ ! ? / ( ) ' (up to 189 characters)
– When using H.323: alphanumeric characters, symbols . @ : ; = * + # _ - $ \ % ^ ! ? / ` ( ) [ ] {|} '
(up to 189 characters)
When using SIP, the user name (portion before the @ mark) can be up to 60 characters, and the domain
name (portion after the @ mark) can be up to 128 characters.
• Enter values that comply with the corresponding standard. For details, contact your network administrator.
About IPv6 Addresses

• When manually setting an IPv6 address, it may be entered in its shortened form or unshortened form.
(Input example)
2001:db8::10
2001:0db8::0010
2001:db8:0:0:0:0:0:10
2001:0db8:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0010

Preparation
6. Press [ENTER], use [

Initial Settings ][ ] to select the desired
connection mode, and then press [ENTER] again.
Note
• The Initial Settings screen is displayed when
you turn the power on for the first time. It will not
be displayed again afterwards.
• After turning the unit on, you need to set the
language, connection mode, device name, date
and time, and network settings. These settings
can be changed later.
1. Press the Power button to turn on the unit.
• The language settings screen is displayed.
Note
• Calls cannot be made with other parties
whose connection mode is different from
yours.
• "NAT Traversal Mode" or "IP / NAT
Traversal Mode" can be used only after
activating KX-VC Series NAT Traversal
Service with an activation key.
7. Press [G].
2. Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to select the 8. Select "Yes" using [ ][ ], then press [ENTER].
desired language. • The device name setting screen is displayed.
Note
9. Enter a name for the device (up to 24 characters)
• The language you can select is as follows: (Page 190).
"English": English (default), "Deutsch":
German, "Français": French, "Italiano":
Italian, "Español": Spanish,
"Nederlands": Dutch, "Português":
Portuguese, " ": Japanese,
"Русскийязык": Russian, " ㅔԧЁ᭛ ":
Chinese, " ": Arabic.
• When Chinese is selected, "Arabic" is
displayed to select Arabic.
3. Press [ENTER].
4. Press [G].
10. Press [G].
5. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER].
• The connection mode setting screen is 11. Select "Yes" using [ ][ ], then press [ENTER].
displayed.
• The date and time setting screen is displayed.
12. Select the item using [ ][ ], then input

information.
• Enter the year (4 digits), month (1–2 digits), day
(1–2 digits), time (24 hour display), and select

Preparation
the date format (Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/ Note

Year, Year/Month/Day) and the hour display • Even if you have selected "Auto", you still
format (12h/24h). may not be able to acquire an IP address
due to problems such as network
congestion. In this case, "Address is not
assigned" is displayed in the upper right of
the Home screen. Contact your network
administrator.
"IP Address (LAN 1)": Enter the IP address of the
unit.
"Subnet mask (LAN 1)": Enter the subnet mask.
"Default Gateway": Enter the IP address of the
default gateway.
Note
• "IP Address (LAN 1)", "Subnet mask
13. Press [G].
(LAN 1)", and "Default Gateway" can be
entered only if "IP Address (LAN
14. Select "Yes" using [ ][ ], then press [ENTER]. 1)" (setting) is set to "Manual".
• The network settings screen is displayed. • If the value for "IP Address (LAN 1)",
"Subnet mask (LAN 1)", or "Default
15. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input: Gateway" contains 1 or 2 digits numbers,
enter these numbers as they are. Do not
enter like [.001].
Example: The IP address is [192.168.0.1].
– Correct entry: [192.168.0.1]
– Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001]
"DNS Server": Use [ ][ ] to select whether the
IP address information for the DNS servers
("Primary DNS Server", "Secondary DNS
Server") will be obtained automatically from a
DHCP server or will be set manually.
– "Auto" (default): Obtain the IP address
information automatically.
Note – "Manual": Set the IP address information
• For the KX-VC1000/KX-VC1300, "IP manually.
Address (LAN 1)" (setting), "IP Address
Note
(LAN 1)", and "Subnet mask (LAN 1)" are
respectively displayed as "IP • To select "Auto", "IP Address (LAN
Address" (setting), "IP Address", and 1)" (setting) must be set to "Auto".
"Subnet mask". • The DNS server must be set to use KX-VC
"IP Address (LAN 1)"(setting): Use [ ][ ] to Series NAT Traversal Service, to check for
upgrades, and to download the latest
select whether the IP address information for this
software from the network.
unit ("IP Address (LAN 1)", "Subnet mask (LAN
1)", "Default Gateway") will be obtained "Primary DNS Server": Enter the IP address of the
automatically from a DHCP server or will be set primary DNS server.
manually. "Secondary DNS Server": Enter the IP address of
– "Auto" (default): Obtain the IP address the secondary DNS server.
information automatically. Note
– "Manual": Set the IP address information
manually. • "Primary DNS Server" and "Secondary
DNS Server" can be entered only if "DNS
Server" is set to "Manual".

Preparation
• If the value for "Primary DNS Server" or

"Secondary DNS Server" contains 1 or 2
digits numbers, enter these numbers as
they are. Do not enter like [.001].
– Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001]
"LAN Mode (LAN 1)": Press [ENTER] and use
[ ][ ] to select the LAN mode.
– "1 Gbps (Auto)": Negotiates with the other
party to determine the LAN mode. The
maximum setting is 1 Gbps (full duplex).
– "1 Gbps (Fix)": Fixes the LAN mode to 1 Gbps
(full duplex).
– "100 Mbps (Auto)" (default): Negotiates with
the other party to determine the LAN mode. The
maximum setting is 100 Mbps (full duplex).
– "100 Mbps (Fix)": Fixes the LAN mode to 100
Mbps (full duplex).
Mbps (full duplex).
Note
• This setting is only displayed for the
KX-VC2000.
• Match settings according to the hub or
router to be connected.
• When "10 Mbps (Fix)" is set, set the "Max.
Bandwidth" of "Call set up" to 10 Mbps or
lower (Page 122).
16. Press [G].
17. Select "Yes" using [ ][ ], then press [ENTER].

• Settings become effective after the automatic
restart.
Note
• If the IP address or subnet mask contains an
invalid value, a message will appear requiring
you to enter a valid IP address or subnet mask.
• A multicast address or broadcast address
cannot be used for the IP address.
• If the unit is turned off and restarted before
completing step 14, you must start again from
step 1. If the unit is restarted after step 14 is
completed, you can restart from step 15.

Starting a Video Conference
S
Making a Video Conference Call

a
You can make a video conference call using one of the following methods.
n
g
Note
a
V
• If a called party does not answer a video conference call within approximately 60 seconds, the call will
i
be terminated automatically.
d
• Only 2-party video conference calls can be made using the incoming call history.
e
• The number of bars in the antenna icon will be 0 to indicate communication bandwidth that is lower
o
than 256 kbps per site. In such cases, the image and voice quality may deteriorate.
C
• Video conference calls cannot be made if the call type programmed in the contact list (SIP or H.323)
has been set to "OFF" on the call type settings screen.
o
• If a video conference call is made using a profile with an entry restriction, and you want to add a party
n
to that call, you cannot call the party by entering an address directly or by using the call history.
f
• If a video conference call is received during another video conference call, a dialogue box is displayed
e
to confirm whether to answer the incoming video conference call.

r
Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" or "No" and press [ENTER].

e
c
• Select "Yes" to answer the video conference call.
e
• Select "No" to stop receiving the incoming video conference call and continue your current video
conference call.
Calling Using One-Touch Connection Numbers From the Home

Screen
Note
• To call using one-touch connection numbers, you need to set them in advance (Page 127).
1 Press [Home].
• The Home screen is displayed.
2 With the dial keys, enter a One-Touch Connection number
(1 to 5). 1
• The information registered in the selected One-Touch
Connection number is displayed.
3 4
3 Press [START] to start the call.

• You can also start the call pressing [ENTER].
4 When you want to end the call, press [END].

Calling from the Contact List (2-party Conference)

Note
• To make a video conference call from the contact list, you must first register contacts in the contact list
(Page 105).
• If "IP Address (LAN 1)" (setting) is set to "Auto" on the network settings screen (Page 118), or if
"IPv6 Address (LAN 1)" (setting) is set to "Auto (SLAAC)" or "Auto (DHCP)" (Page 119), the
unit’s IP address will be automatically obtained, and therefore may change to a different IP address
from the one registered in the other party’s contact list. In such cases, when the other party tries to call
you by selecting a registered IP address from their contact list, the call will not be connected. For details,
contact your network administrator.
1 Press [MENU].
• The Menu screen is displayed.
2 Select "Contact List" using [ ][ ] and press 1
[ENTER].
• The contact list screen is displayed. The entries are
grouped in the index tabs and displayed in 2, 3
alphabetical order of "Site". 5
4
Note
• If you press [Y], entries are displayed in the
speed dial number order.

3 Select the entry you want to call using [ ][ ].

• You can switch the index tab back and forth using
[ ][ ]. (Index tabs in which no entries exist will be
skipped.)
• Press a numeric button on the remote control to
switch to the index tab assigned to that button, as
shown below.
Numeric button Index Tab

1 –
2 ABC
3 DEF
4 GHI
5 JKL
6 MNO
7 PQRS
8 TUV
9 WXYZ
0 0-9
-&!/
# –
Note
• If the display is sorted by speed dial number in
step 2, you can click a speed dial number (1
through 600) to select it.

Calling Using Profile (Multiple-party Video Conference Calls)

When making multiple-party video conference calls from the Menu screen, you can make a call using one of
20 profiles (1 to 20).
Note
• To use profiles with the KX-VC1000, you must use an activation key to enable 4 Point Built-in MCU
support (Page 20).
• To call using a profile, you need to have a profile programmed in profile settings in advance
(Page 108).
1 Press [MENU].
2 Select "Profile" using [ ][ ] and press [ENTER]. 1
• The profile list screen is displayed.
2, 3
4 5
3 Select the profile you want to use to make a call using

[ ][ ].
• For ending a multiple-party video conference call,
refer to "Disconnecting Parties During Video
Conference Call (Page 69)".
Note
• You can make a video conference call by changing
the party of the selected profile before starting the call
by pressing [START]. Be aware that the selected
connection destination will not be saved.

1. Press [B].
• The profile settings screen is displayed.
2. Select "Site" using [ ][ ], then press [ENTER].
• The screen for selecting the party you want to
call from the profile is displayed.
3. Select the party using [ ][ ], then press
[ENTER].
• Selecting an item will add or remove the " "
mark for the item in the selection column. The
contacts with a " " mark will be called.
4. Press [START] to start the call.
• A dialogue box to confirm the start of a call is
displayed.

Calling by Entering an Address Directly

When using IP mode, you can make a video conference call by entering the IP address (or host name), SIP
URI (or SIP user name), H.323 extension, H.323 name, or MCU’s conference room number@IP address.
When using NAT Traversal mode, you can make a call by entering the connection number.
Note
• When using a KX-VC1000 that has not been expanded for 4 Point Built-in MCU support, one connection
can be established, and "Connection mode", "Site", and "Outgoing Bandwidth" are displayed for
"Connection mode 1", "Site 1", and "Outgoing Bandwidth / Site".
1 Press [MENU].
2 Select "Manual Dial" using [ ][ ] and press 1
[ENTER].
• The manual dial screen is displayed. (The screen is 2-5,
from when using the KX-VC1600 (with standard 7-8
features).) 10
9
Note
• You can display the manual dial screen by
pressing [START] in the Home screen instead
of performing steps 1 and 2.
3 Use [ ][ ] to select the connection mode you want to
input ("Connection mode 1" to "Connection mode
3") and press [ENTER].
4 Use [ ][ ] to select the connection mode ("IP Mode
(SIP)", "IP Mode (H.323)", "NAT Traversal Mode").
5 Use [ ][ ] to select the site ("Site 1" to "Site 3").
6 When using IP mode, enter the IP address (or host
name), SIP URI (or SIP user name), H.323 extension,
H.323 name, or MCU’s conference room number@IP
address. When using NAT Traversal mode, enter the
connection number (7 digits).
Note
• When starting multiple-party video conference
calls, repeat steps 3-6.
• When calling more than 4 parties, press [R] to
display the next page.

7 Use [ ][ ] to select "Outgoing Bandwidth / Site"

and press [ENTER] on the first page.
8 Use [ ][ ] to select the outgoing bandwidth/site to be
used ("Not Specified", "256 kbps"–"18 Mbps"). (The
default maximum selectable value: "9.0 Mbps")
Note
• When using the KX-VC1300, you can have video conference calls with a maximum of 3 parties
simultaneously. When you are using the KX-VC1600, the maximum is 5 simultaneous parties, and if
you have the activation key (KX-VCS304) for enhanced features, you can make multiple-party video
conference calls with a maximum of 9 parties. When you are using the KX-VC2000, the maximum is
15 simultaneous parties, and if you have the activation key (KX-VCS305) for enhanced features, you
can make multiple-party video conference calls with a maximum of 19 or 23 parties.
• The KX-VC1000 can connect with one party. Using the KX-VCS314 activation key allows you to
connect to up to 3 parties.
• If an IPv4 address contains 1 or 2 digit numbers, enter these numbers as they are. Do not enter like
[.001].
– Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001]
• For the IPv6 address input format, refer to Page 47.
• When making a call by specifying an IPv6 address port number, enclose the IPv6 address in square
brackets.
(Input example) [2001:db8::10]:5060
• To initiate a video conference call by entering a SIP URI (SIP user name@SIP domain name), you
must set "SIP Server" to "ON" and specify "SIP Server Address", "SIP Username", and "SIP
Domain Name". Also, specify "Digest Authentication", "Authentication ID", and "Authentication
Password" as necessary (Page 144). For details, contact your network administrator.
• When making a video conference call within your own SIP domain, you can make the call by entering
the other party’s SIP user name. When the other party is not within your SIP domain, you must also
include their SIP domain name in addition to their SIP user name.
When a SIP domain name is not specified, your own SIP domain name is automatically appended to
the address and the call is made. Be careful as this may result in calling the wrong party.
• See Page 47 for details about the characters that can be input for address entry.
Enter a standards-compliant value. For details, contact your network administrator.
• To initiate a video conference call by entering an MCU’s conference room number@IP address, "SIP
Server" and "Gatekeeper" must be set to "OFF" (Page 144, Page 145).
• If the other party is using the KX-VC300/KX-VC600 with a software version older than 3.00 (not
including 3.00), you cannot make a video conference call using H.323. You must set "SIP" to "ON"
on the call type settings screen (Page 143).
• Items that have been set to "OFF" on the call type settings screen (Page 143) cannot be set in the
connection mode settings.
• You can refer to the contact list or call history when entering a destination by following the procedure
below from the manual dial screen (you cannot enter a destination using the profile):
When using IP mode: the IP address (or host name), SIP URI (or SIP user name), H.323 extension,
H.323 name, or MCU’s conference room number@IP address

When using NAT Traversal mode: the connection number
1. Press [G].
• A dialogue box to select either the contact list or call history is displayed.
2. Use [ ][ ] to select the contact list or call history, and then press [ENTER].
3. Use [ ][ ] to select the contact you want to refer to.
• For the contact list, you can use [ ][ ] or the numeric buttons of the remote control to select
the displayed tab (Page 53).
• For the call history, press [G] to switch between the incoming call history and the outgoing call
history.
4. Press [ENTER].
• When using H.323, you can also call by entering the other party’s IP address (or host name) %H.323
extension (or H.323 name).
• When the called party was selected from the contact list, the site name for the other party is displayed.
• When the called party was selected from the call history, selecting a contact by their displayed site
name in the history will display the site name for the other party.
• For a party that is displaying a site name, the site name can be changed when inputting letters and
numbers directly by pressing [Y] to delete the site name and then input it.

Calling from the Call History

You can make a video conference call from the call history. The call history is divided into outgoing and incoming
calls. The last 100 video conference calls made and received are stored in the outgoing and incoming call
history. Information such as the contact name, group name, address information*1, the date and time, the
duration of the call, the result of the call, and the connection mode is displayed for each call on the outgoing
call history screen and incoming call history screen. If the address of an entry in the call history is deleted from
or edited in the contact list, the contact name in the call history entry will be replaced by the address information.
*1
Address information is as follows.
IP address/host name/SIP URI/H.323 extension/H.323 name/MCU’s conference room number@IP address/MCU’s SIP user
name@IP address/connection number. (When using NAT Traversal mode, the connection number is displayed.)
Note
• If the other party uses the same SIP domain name as you, only the SIP user name, and not the SIP
URI (SIP user name@SIP domain name) will be displayed in the call history.
Outgoing Call History:

• For video conference calls made using the contact list, the contact name is displayed. For video conference
calls made by entering the IP address (or host name)/SIP URI/H.323 extension/H.323 name/MCU’s
conference room number@IP address/connection number directly (Page 56), that information is displayed
instead of the contact name. (That information is displayed even if a matching entry exists in the contact
list.)
• Even when a profile is used to make a video conference call, the call will appear in the outgoing call history.
You can then make a video conference call with a profile from the outgoing call history.
• If consecutive video conference calls are made to the same destination, only the latest call will appear in
the outgoing call history.
Incoming Call History:

• If the calling party’s IP address/SIP URI/H.323 extension/H.323 name/MCU’s conference room
number@IP address/connection number is registered in the contact list, the contact name/group name is
displayed. Otherwise, the IP address (or host name)/SIP URI/H.323 extension/H.323 name/MCU’s
conference room number@IP address/MCU’s SIP user name@IP address/connection number is
displayed.
• Depending on the type of MCU, a video conference call may be received from the MCU’s SIP user
name@IP address rather than the MCU’s conference room number@IP address. In that case, you directly
cannot call the MCU’s conference room from this incoming call history.
• If consecutive unanswered video conference calls are received from the same party, only the latest call
will appear in the incoming call history.
• When connecting to a non-Panasonic video conference system, you may not be able to initiate video
conference calls with SIP URIs (or SIP user names)/H.323 extension/H.323 name in the incoming call
history. In this case, contact your network administrator.

1 Press [MENU].
2 Select "Call History" using [ ][ ] and press 1
[ENTER].
• The outgoing call history screen is displayed.
2, 3
4, 5 6

Note
• When calling using a profile or when a call is
received during Profile standby settings, the call
is added to the outgoing and incoming call
history between the parties, and a profile history
showing the profile used is displayed. The Profile
ID (PID) is displayed in the profile history and the
individual outgoing and incoming call histories
that used the profile. However, when using a
KX-VC1000 that has not been expanded for 4
Point Built-in MCU support, the Profile ID (PID)
column is not displayed.
• The result of the video conference call is
displayed in the "Call result" column as follows:
– : The video conference call was
established.
– : The video conference call was not
established.
– : The video conference call was made
using multicasting or a profile was used.
• To move to the incoming call history screen,
press [G]. You can switch between the outgoing
call history screen and the incoming call history
screen by pressing [G].
• In the incoming call history, if a party is not
registered in your contact list, the address
information received from the party is displayed.
• In the outgoing call history, if a party is registered
in your contact list, the contact name is
displayed. However, when calling by entering an
IP address (or host name), SIP URI (or SIP user
name), H.323 extension, H.323 name, or MCU’s
conference room number@IP address/
connection number (Page 56), even if the party
is registered in your contact list, the entered
information is displayed instead of the contact
name.
• When a contact in the incoming call history is
newly added to your contact list, the incoming call
history will be updated to display the contact’s
information from the contact list.
• When a party that is not registered in your contact
list is selected, if you press [B], the contact list
registration screen will be displayed and a new
contact can be registered (Page 107). Also, you
may not be able to register a SIP URI (or SIP user
name), H.323 extension, or H.323 name from the
incoming call history to the contact list for
reasons such as non-compliance with the
relevant standards. In this case, contact your
network administrator.

3 Select the party you want to call using [ ][ ].
Note
• If you press [ENTER], the call history details
screen is displayed. (Not displayed when the
profile history or multicast call history (outgoing)
is selected.)
• When not selecting a local site (Page 113), the

values of the basic settings are displayed for
"Local site name".
• "Bandwidth" displays the mediated bandwidth
for connected sites.
• Depending on the other party, "Device type"
may be blank.
• When using a KX-VC1000 that has not been
expanded for 4 Point Built-in MCU support,
"Profile ID" is not displayed.
4 Press [START].
• The manual dial screen is displayed. (Not displayed
when the multicast history was selected.)
Note
• You can change the number of sites called
or edit the other party’s address.


Answering a Video Conference Call

Depending on your setting, you can respond to a request to participate in a video conference call manually
(manual answer), automatically (automatic answer), or forcibly (forced answer) (Page 121).
Note
• For sites operating as "Sub Sites" in multiple-party video conference calls using the Main Site’s built-in
MCU, for each Sub Site, set "More than one incoming call" to "OFF" in "Call set up". With this
setting, calls cannot be received during a video conference call.
When Manual Answer is Set

When a video conference call is incoming there will be an incoming call ring, and a dialogue box is displayed.
When the caller is registered in the contact list, the caller’s site
is displayed.
When the caller is not registered, the caller’s IP address,
connection number or other caller information that is received
is displayed.
Note
• If the other party uses the same SIP domain name as you, only the SIP user name, and not the SIP
URI (SIP user name@SIP domain name) is displayed.
• If the caller’s group/site name, host name, SIP URI (or SIP user name), H.323 extension, or H.323
name is too long to display, it will be shortened and ended with "...".
Operation
1 Press [START].
• The video conference begins.
• You can also answer the video
conference call by pressing [ENTER].

Note
• If you do not answer a video conference call within approximately 60 seconds, the call will be terminated
automatically.
• If a video conference call is received while making a video conference call, a dialogue box to confirm
if you answer a video conference call is displayed (only when "More than one incoming call" is set
to "ON" in "Call set up").
– When "Yes" is selected, you can answer a video conference call.
– When "No" is selected, you can stop receiving a video conference call and continue making a
video conference call.
When Automatic Answer is Set

When a video conference call is incoming while the Home screen is displayed, the call will be automatically
answered after one ring, and transmission then begins. When a video conference call is incoming with a screen
other than the Home screen displayed, a dialogue box is displayed, and the incoming calling continues.
Forced Answering
When a video conference call is incoming, the call is automatically answered regardless of existing calls or
while idle, and transmission then begins.

Connecting to an MCU
Connecting to an MCU allows you to have a video conference call with 25 or more parties.
Intranet
MCU
Note
• MCUs you want to connect to must meet the following criteria. Confirm the settings of the MCU.
– Supports SIP or H.323 communication
– Supports communication with the H.264 Baseline Profile and H.264 High Profile
– Supports communication with the G.711, G.722, G.722.1, and G.722.1 Annex C voice codecs
• For details about the types of MCUs you can connect to, contact your dealer.
• Video conference calls to an MCU through a SIP server using a SIP URI are not guaranteed. IP
addresses must be specified to make calls.
• The connection specifications (e.g., resolution) and available functions (e.g., content sharing) differ
depending on the MCU you connect to. For details, contact your dealer.
• The procedure for connecting to an MCU differs depending on the MCU. For details, contact your
dealer.
• Audio sent to the other party is monaural.
• While you are displaying a sub video camera’s image, you cannot send a still image from the sub video
camera.
• Encrypted communication may not be supported. In such cases, connect to an MCU over an intranet
or via a VPN. For details, contact your dealer.
• For connection to an MCU, the smallest bandwidth value from among the following settings is applied.
Depending on the network conditions, you must specify an appropriate bandwidth setting.
– "Max. Bandwidth" (Page 122) in "Call set up"
– "Max. Bandwidth Per Site (LAN 1)"/"Max. Bandwidth Per Site (LAN 2)" (Page 122,
Page 122) in "Call set up"
– "Max. Bandwidth" registered in the contact list (Page 105)
– "Outgoing Bandwidth / Site" when the contact is directly input and a call is made (Page 57)

Operating an MCU Remotely using Tone Signals

When connecting to an MCU, you can send tone signals by pressing buttons (0–9, #, or ) on the remote
control. Doing so allows you to operate (e.g., change the screen layout) the MCU remotely.
Note
• Features and operations that can be performed
remotely will vary depending on the MCU.
• If the MCU you are connecting to does not support
tone signals, an error message is displayed.
• If the other party sends tone signals to you, sound
may be interrupted or a ringing noise may occur.
• You can operate the other party’s device using tone 1
signals with the KX-VC2000/KX-VC1600/
KX-VC1300/KX-VC1000/HDVC-MPCS.
1 Enter a tone signal (0–9, #, or ).
• The input field (A) is displayed.
A
Note
• The input field can only contain up to 16
characters. If you input 17 characters, the first
character input will not be displayed in the input
field but all tone signals will be sent.
• The input field is not displayed until a tone signal
is entered.
• If a tone signal is not entered for about 3
seconds, the input field disappears.
• If you enter further tone signals after the input
field has disappeared, the tone signals entered
the previous time are also displayed.

During Video Conference Calls
D
Adding Parties to an Existing Video Conference Call

r
(Except Sub Sites)

n
A site in a 2-party video conference call or the Main Site can use the following operations to add parties to an
d
existing call.
e
o
Note
C
• When using a KX-VC1000 that has not been expanded for 4 Point Built-in MCU support, "Make a
o
call" is not displayed and you cannot connect to another party during a video conference.
n
1. Press [MENU].
• The communication menu screen is displayed.
e
2. Use [ ][ ][ ][ ] to select "Make a call" and press [ENTER].

r
• A dialogue box to select a dialling method is displayed.

e
Note
• For sites that are in a video conference call that was made using methods other than profile calling,
the dialogue box is not displayed, and the manual dial screen is displayed instead.
• For sites that are in a video conference call that was made using profile calling with entry restriction
set to "ON" in the profile settings, the dialogue box is not displayed, and the profile used to make
the call is selected.
3. Use [ ][ ] to select the dialling method ("Profile" or "Manual Dial").
When selecting profile:

• The site selection screen is displayed.
1. Select the site that you want to add using [ ][ ] and press [ENTER].
• " " is displayed in the selection field.

When selecting manual dial:

• The manual dial screen is displayed. (The screen is from when using the KX-VC1600 (with standard
features).)
1. Program the information of the other party whom you want to add using [ ][ ].
Note
• You can refer to the contact list or call history when entering the other party’s information.
Press [G].
• A dialogue box to select either the contact list or call history is displayed.
Use [ ][ ] to select the contact list or call history, and then press [ENTER].
Use [ ][ ] to select the contact you want to refer to.
• For the contact list, you can use [ ][ ] or the numeric buttons of the remote control to
select the displayed tab (Page 53).
• For the call history, press [G] to switch between the incoming call history and the outgoing
call history.
Press [ENTER].
4. Press [START].
Note
• If your own site becomes a Sub Site, do not try to add additional sites to a video conference call.
• When the called party was selected from the contact list, the site name for the other party is displayed.
• When the called party was selected from the call history, selecting a contact by their displayed site
name in the history will display the site name for the other party.
• For a party that is displaying a site name, the site name can be changed when inputting letters and
numbers directly by pressing [Y] to delete the site name and then enter it.

Disconnecting Parties During Video Conference Call

You can disconnect parties during a video conference call.
Disconnecting a 2-party conference

1. Press [END].
• The video conference call is disconnected.
Disconnecting a multi-party conference (Main Site only)

1. Press [END].
• A dialogue box to select the party you want to disconnect is displayed. (The screen is from when using
the KX-VC1600 (with standard features).)
Note
• In step 1, pressing [MENU], using [ ][ ][ ][ ] to select "Disconnect", and then pressing
[ENTER] will still display the dialogue box.
2. Select the party whom you want to disconnect using [ ][ ][ ][ ] and press [ENTER].
• The selected party is disconnected.
Disconnecting a multi-party conference (Sub Site only)

1. Press [END].
• The video conference call is disconnected.

Changing the Contents Sharing Method During

Communication
The method for sending contents during communication can be changed.
Note
• The method for sending contents cannot be changed while contents are being sent.
1. Press [MENU].
2. Use [ ][ ][ ][ ] to select "Send Cont Method", and press [ENTER].
• A dialogue box for selecting the contents sending method is displayed.
3. Use [ ][ ] to select a content sending method, and press [ENTER].

– "Auto" (default): Automatically changes between dual stream and single stream.
– "Single stream": Fixed to single stream.

Changing the Screen Layout during a Video

Conference Call
You can change the layout of the screen during a video conference call.
Note
• Display patterns differ depending on the number of displays, the number of parties, whether to share
contents or not, whether it is Main Site or Sub Site, and whether the communication is single stream
or dual stream.
• The default screen layout during a video conference call can be changed by the settings of "Default
Screen Layout" of "Video Output" (Page 150).
1 Press [LAYOUT].
• The screen will cycle through the available layouts
each time you press [LAYOUT].
1
– Layout 1: The other party’s image is displayed
full screen.
– Layout 2: The other party’s image is displayed
full screen, and your own image is displayed in
the upper right subscreen (PwithP).
– Layout 3: The other party’s image and your own
image are displayed (Side by side).
– Layout 4: Your own image is displayed full
screen.
Example: 1 display, 2-party video conference, without content sharing, Main Site, Single stream
communication
[LAYOUT] [LAYOUT] [LAYOUT]

You
The
The other
The other party
party
other You You
party
[LAYOUT]

Changing the Other Party’s Screen Display Layout

During a video conference call, you can change the other party’s screen display layout. The numbers in the
layout configurations indicate each site’s image display priority. (Hereafter, the display with priority 1 will be
described as the "main display".)
Note
• When using a KX-VC1000 that has not been expanded for 4 Point Built-in MCU support, "Screen
mode set." is not displayed in the communication menu.
Main Site operations

1. Press [MENU].
2. Use [ ][ ][ ][ ] to "Screen mode set." and press [ENTER].
• The layout settings dialogue box is displayed.
3. Press [ENTER], use [ ][ ] to select a layout to set, and then press [ENTER].
– "Auto": Automatically changes the layout depending on the number of parties joining a video
conference call and the MCU mode (Page 77, Page 108, Page 124).
– "CP1" to "CP28": Changes to the selected layout.
4. Use [ ][ ] to select "Done" and press [ENTER].
Layout according to the number of sites when "Auto" is selected (Discussion Mode)
Number of Sites Layout Number
2 CP1
3–4 CP4
5–6 CP6
7–8 CP8
9 CP9
10 CP10
11-13 CP13
14-15 CP15
16 CP16
17-20 CP20

21 CP21
22-24 CP24
Layout according to the number of sites when "Auto" is selected (Presentation Mode)
2 CP1
3 CP2
4–5 CP4
6–7 CP6
8–9 CP8
10 CP9
11 CP10
12-14 CP13
15-16 CP15
17 CP16
18-21 CP20
22 CP21
23-24 CP24
Layout patterns that can be selected during a video conference call

Layout Number Layout Configuration
CP1 1
CP2 1 2
1 2
CP4
3 4

2
1
CP6 3
4 5 6
2
1 3
CP8 4
5 6 7 8
1 2 3
CP9 4 5 6
7 8 9
1 2
CP10
3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10
1 2 3
4 5
CP13
6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13
2
1
CP15 3
4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
CP16
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
1 2
CP20 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20
2 3
1 4 5
6 7
CP21 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 21

1 2 5 6
7 8
9 10
CP24 3 4
11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
CP25 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24 25
2 3 4
1 5 6 7
8 9 10
CP28 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28
Operation of Sub Sites

During a video conference call, you can use remote control operations to change the screen display layout
from a Sub Site.
Remote Control Operation and Layout for Sub Sites

Numerical Keypad Layout Number
*21 CP1
*22 CP2
*24 CP4
*26 CP6
*28 CP8
*29 CP9
*20 CP10
*30 CP10
*33 CP13
*35 CP15
*36 CP16
*40 CP20
*41 CP21
*44 CP24
*45 CP25
*48 CP28

Note
• By using *#4 or *#6 you can switch to lower or higher layout numbers. *#4 switches to a lower order
layout and *#6 switches to a higher order layout.
• If "DTMF layout change" in "MCU Settings" is set to "OFF", operations cannot be performed from
a Sub Site (Page 126).
• When the layout is changed from a Sub Site, all sites’ layouts are also changed.
• When the layout of the Main Site automatically changes (when "Screen Layout" of "MCU
Settings" is set to "Auto" [Page 124], or when "Screen mode set." is set to "Auto" on the
communication menu screen [Page 72]), operations cannot be made from a Sub Site.

Changing the MCU Mode (Main Site Only)

You can change the MCU mode during a video conference call.
Note
• When using a KX-VC1000 that has not been expanded for 4 Point Built-in MCU support, "MCU
Mode" is not displayed in the communication menu.
1. Press [MENU].
2. Use [ ][ ][ ][ ] to select "MCU Mode" and press [ENTER].
• The MCU mode settings dialogue box is displayed.
3. Use [ ][ ] to select the MCU mode.

– "Discussion": The same image is displayed for the main site and sub sites. This mode is suited to
discussion-style conferences.
– "Presentation": The main site sees a composite image including the sub sites, and the sub sites see
the image from the main site only. This mode is suited to lecture-style conferences.
Note
• When ""Y" Button during MCU" in "GUI Settings" is set to "Discussion / Presentation", you can
switch the MCU mode by pressing [Y] (Page 154).

Changing the Setting of the Main Display (Main Site

only)
The settings of the site displayed as the main site during a call can be changed.
Note
• When using a KX-VC1000 that has not been expanded for 4 Point Built-in MCU support, "Main
Position set." is not displayed in the communication menu.
1. Press [MENU].
2. Use [ ][ ][ ][ ] to select "Main Position set." and press [ENTER].
• The main display settings dialogue box that corresponds to the MCU mode (Page 77, Page 108,
Page 124) is displayed.
3. Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to select a switching method and then press [ENTER].
When using Discussion Mode
– "Local Site": Displays your own site.
– "Voice Activation 1": The party (caller) with the loudest volume during a call will be automatically set
as the main display.
– "Voice Activation 2 (Local Site)": Your own site's image is fixed as the main display, and the party
(caller) with the loudest volume during a call will be set to display priority 2.
– "Voice Activation 2 (Site 1)" to "Voice Activation 2 (Site 23)": The selected site is displayed as the
main display, and the site with the loudest volume at the time is displayed as display priority 2.
– "Site 1" to "Site 23": Displays the selected site as the main display.
– "Specified Position": Displays each site's image in the specified position.
When using Presentation Mode
– "Site 1" to "Site 23": Displays the selected site as the main display.
– "Specified Position": Displays each sub site's image in the specified position.
Note
• "Specified Position" can only be selected when registering a profile (you can select any item other
than "Specified Position" while on a video conference call, but you cannot select "Specified
Position" again). For information about the displayed position when "Specified Position" is
selected, refer to the section about profile registration (Page 109, Page 109).
• In the following situations, the current setting is displayed as "Voice Activation 2 (-)". You can
also select the switching method.
– When a site has disconnected after you set "Voice Activation 2 (Site 1)" to "Voice Activation
2 (Site 23)".

– When "Main Position (Discussion)" is set to "Voice Activation 2 (Site 1)" to "Voice
Activation 2 (Site 30)" in the site's registration, and the selected site is not connected
(Page 109).
Note
• When sharing content via single stream communication, the content will automatically displayed
as the main display.

Changing the Site Name Display (Main Site only)

The setting of whether site names are displayed during a video conference call can be changed.
Note
• When using a KX-VC1000 that has not been expanded for 4 Point Built-in MCU support, "Site name
display" is not displayed in the communication menu.
1. Press [MENU].
2. Use [ ][ ][ ][ ] to select "Site name display" and press [ENTER].
• The site name display setting dialogue box is displayed.
3. Use [ ][ ] to select whether to display a site name ("ON", "OFF"), and press [ENTER].

Changing the Audio Settings for Other Parties (Main

Site only)
During a video conference call, you can change the mode that is used to mix the audio from your own site and
the other party's site.
Note
• When using a KX-VC1000 that has not been expanded for 4 Point Built-in MCU support, "Other
Site's Audio" is not displayed in the communication menu.
1. Press [MENU].
2. Use [ ][ ][ ][ ] to select "Other Site's Audio" and press [ENTER].
• The other party’s audio setting dialogue box is displayed.
3. Use [ ][ ] to select "Mix (Auto)", "Mix (Selection)", or "Mute" and press [ENTER].
– "Mix (Auto)" (default): Audio from the loudest 4 sites is automatically mixed together.
– "Mix (Selection)": The audio from the selected sites (up to 4) is mixed together.
– "Mute": Mutes the audio of the other party. Only the audio of the Main Site is output.

Changing the Settings for Audio Mixing Sites (Main

Site Only)
When "Other Site's Audio" is set to "Mix (Selection)", you can change the audio settings for sites whose
audio is mixed together. (Page 81, Page 108)
Note
• When using a KX-VC1000 that has not been expanded for 4 Point Built-in MCU support, "Audio Mixing
Site" is not displayed in the communication menu.
1. Press [MENU].
2. Use [ ][ ][ ][ ] to select "Audio Mixing Site" and press [ENTER].
• Audio mixing site setting dialogue box is displayed.
3. Use [ ][ ] to select the sites whose audio will be mixed together and press [ENTER].
• Press [ENTER] to select/deselect the desired sites. You can select up to 4 sites.
Note
• This setting is only available when "Other Site's Audio" in the communication menu (Page 81) or
"Other Site's Audio" in the profile setup (Page 108) is set to "Mix (Selection)".
Starting and Stopping Recording

You can start and stop recording during a video conference call. The recorded video and audio are saved on
the USB memory device connected to the back of the unit.
Note
• For details about recording features, refer to "Using USB Recording Features (Page 183)".
• You can also start and stop recording while idle (Page 132).
1. Press [MENU].
2. Use [ ][ ][ ][ ] to select "USB Rec" and press [ENTER].
• The dialogue box to start or stop recording is displayed.
3. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" or "No" and press [ENTER].
When not recording
– Selecting "Yes" starts recording.
– Selecting "No" does not start recording.

When recording
– Selecting "Yes" stops recording.
– Selecting "No" does not stop recording.
Note
If you set "USB Rec" to ""G" Button during call" in "GUI Settings", you can start and stop recording
during a call using [G] (Page 154).

Checking the Call History

The history of the connections with other sites from the start of the call to the present can be checked.
1. Press [B] during a video conference call.
• The call history screen is displayed.
2. Press [BACK].
• The display returns to the video conference call screen.
Note
• You can use [ ][ ] to scroll in the call history screen and display the previous or next history entry.
• If no operations are performed for approximately 10 seconds after the call history screen is displayed,
the display returns to the video conference call screen.
• The call history of sites that the other party in the video conference call has connected to are not
displayed.

Adjusting the Volume

You can adjust the volume during a video conference call.
1 Press [VOLUME (+/–)].
• The volume level bar is displayed at the bottom of
the screen.
2 Adjust the volume using [VOLUME (+/–)].
• Pressing [+] will increase the volume of the other
party’s voice.
• Pressing [–] will decrease the volume of the other
party’s voice.
After about 3 seconds, the volume level bar disappears. 1, 2
Note
• You can set the volume level of a video conference call before starting the call (Page 128).
• After ending a video conference call, the volume level returns to the volume level set before starting
the call.
• You cannot adjust the display’s volume.

Muting the Microphone

During a video conference call, you can mute the microphone so that your voice cannot be heard by the other
party. You will be able to hear the other party’s voice, but they will not be able to hear you.
Note
• You can set the microphone(s) to be mute at the start of a video conference call regardless of which
party initiated the call (Page 122).
Muting the Microphone (Operation with the Remote Control)

1 Press [MIC MUTE].
• An icon appears in the status display area of the
screen (Page 41), and the LED light on the Boundary
Microphone becomes red. Make sure the colour of
the LED changes.
• Pressing [MIC MUTE] again will unmute the
microphone. The LED light on the Boundary
Microphone becomes green. Make sure the colour
of the LED changes.

Muting the Microphone (Operation with the Boundary Microphone)

1 Press the MIC Mute button.
1 1
• An icon appears in the status display area of
the screen (Page 41), and the LED light on the
Boundary Microphone becomes red. Make
sure the colour of the LED changes.
• Pressing the MIC Mute button again will Digital Boundary Analogue Boundary
unmute the microphone. The LED light on the Microphone Microphone
Boundary Microphone becomes green. Make
sure the colour of the LED changes.
Note
• When multiple Digital Boundary
Microphones are connected, pressing
the MIC Mute button of one Digital
Boundary Microphone will mute all
Digital Boundary Microphones.
• When using Digital Boundary
Microphones and an Analogue
Boundary Microphone together,
pressing the MIC Mute button on one
Boundary Microphone will mute all
Boundary Microphones.
• If a headset is connected, the MIC Mute
button on a Boundary Microphone will
not work.

Reducing Microphone Noise

You can reduce the amount of ambient noise picked up by the microphone (shuffling of papers, etc.) during a
video conference call. When noise reduction is in effect, the volume level of voices may also be reduced.
1 Press [Y].
• "Whisper Mode [ON]" is displayed, and noise
reduction is enabled.
1
• Pressing [Y] again will display "Whisper Mode
[OFF]", and noise reduction is disabled.
Note
• Noise reduction is available only when Digital
Boundary Microphones are connected.
• You can set whether to enable noise reduction
for a video conference call before starting the
call (Page 123).
• After a video conference call is finished, the
noise reduction setting returns to the value set
before starting the call.
• When ""Y" Button during MCU" in "GUI
Settings" is set to "Discussion /
Presentation", you can switch the MCU mode
by pressing the [Y] button during calls that use
the MCU (except for KX-VC1000) (Page 154).
• This feature is disabled for KX-VC1000, and
noise reduction is not displayed on the [Y] button
in the shortcut key area. If the unit has been
expanded for 4 Point Built-in MCU support, the
option to change the MCU mode is assigned to
the [Y] button during video conferences that use
the MCU.

Displaying a Computer’s Screen and the Sub Video

Camera’s Image
When a computer or sub video camera is connected to the unit, you can display the computer’s screen or the
sub video camera’s image on your display and to other parties. This is convenient when explaining something
on the computer’s screen or the sub video camera’s image while showing them to others, for example.
Main video Main video

camera camera
Sub video Sub video
camera camera
Computer Computer
Router Router
Internet
Note
• The computer screen resolutions supported by the unit are VGA (640 ´ 480), SVGA (800 ´ 600), XGA
(1024 ´ 768), HD (1280 ´ 720), and WXGA (1280 ´ 768, 1280 ´ 800), SXGA (1280 ´ 1024), FWXGA
(1360 ´ 768, 1366 ´ 768), WXGA+ (1440 ´ 900), WXGA++ (1600 ´ 900), UXGA (1600 ´ 1200), WSXGA
+ (1680 ´ 1050), Full-HD (1920 ´ 1080).
1. Press [PC] or [CAMERA SUB] during a video conference call.
For dual stream communication:
• You can send the image of your video camera and the image of your computer’s screen or a sub video
camera at the same time to the other party. You can view the other party and check shared data at the
same time.
Note
• If dual stream communication is disabled in the communication settings (Page 122), or if a device
that does not support dual stream communication is connected, the screen switching method will
be used.
When using the screen switching method (hereafter referred to as "single stream communication"):
• Switches the display from the image of the main video camera to that of the computer’s screen or the
image of the sub camera. The same image is also shown on the other party’s display.
2. Press [CAMERA MAIN] to return to the image of the main video camera.

Example: single stream communication (2 screens Example: dual stream communication (2 screens
used, 4-party video conference, at the Main Site) used, 4-party video conference, at the Main Site)
Without contents Without contents
sharing sharing
HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI1 HDMI2
Site 1 Site 2 Site 1 Site 2

Your Your
Own Site Own Site
Site 3 Site 4 Site 3 Site 4
[PC]/ [PC]/
[CAMERA MAIN] [CAMERA MAIN]
[CAMERA SUB] [CAMERA SUB]
With contents With contents

sharing sharing
Site 1 Site 2
Other Video Other Video Other Video
Sources Sources Sources
Site 3 Site 4
[LAYOUT] [LAYOUT]
Site 1 Site 2
Other Video Other Video Other Video
Sources Sources Sources
Site 3 Site 4
[LAYOUT] [LAYOUT]
Other Video Other Video Other Video Other Video

Sources Sources Sources Sources
[LAYOUT] [LAYOUT]
*Sites 1 through 4 are your own site or another party’s site.

Note
• Pressing [LAYOUT] in succession will
switch the displays of the 2 monitors in
different combinations of the contents image
display, the contents image combined with
the camera image, and the camera image
display.
• For single stream communication:
– During a 2-party call, depending on the
screen layout state of the other party, the
display of the other party may not show
the same screen as yours. In such
cases, press [CAMERA MAIN] to cancel
contents sharing, or instruct the other
party to change their screen layout to
one that displays your screen.
• For dual stream communication:
– While sharing the contents of a
computer’s screen or the sub camera
image, the other party can also share
their contents. Note that in this case, the
images for the contents of all sites will
change to the last shared image.
• While the Home screen (idle screen) is
displayed, pressing [PC] or [CAMERA
SUB] will display the contents of the
computer’s screen or the sub camera’s
image. When displaying the computer’s
screen or the image of the sub camera, the
system will not enter screen standby mode.
To return to the Home screen, press
[CAMERA MAIN].

Controlling a Video Camera
C

n
If a PTZ (pan, tilt, zoom) camera or a FIX camera is connected to your unit or the other party’s unit, you can
l
control the pan (side-to-side movement), the tilt (up-down movement), and the zoom of the video camera during
l
a video conference call. You can perform this operation with the main video camera or a sub video camera.
i
n
Note
g
• In this manual, "PTZ camera" indicates a video camera whose moving parts will rotate when the
a
direction of the video camera is changed. "FIX camera" indicates a video camera that has no moving
V
parts and does not rotate.

i
• For details about compatible video camera models, contact your dealer.
d
• The features that can be used may be limited depending on your video camera model.
e
(e.g., A video camera with only a zoom feature)

o
• When the other party is using a non-Panasonic video conference system, some operations may not
C
be available, or unintended operations may occur.

a
• The setting "Direct Cam Ctrl on Home Screen" can be used to disable the operation of idle video
cameras (Page 131).
m
• If any of the other parties is using the KX-VC500/KX-VC300/KX-VC600 with a software version older
e
than 2.30 (not including 2.30), you will not be able to control any of the other party’s video cameras.
r
You will only be able to control your own video camera.

a
• In order for other parties to be able to control your video camera, you must set "CAM ctrl from remote
site(s)" in your settings to "ON" (by default, it is set to "OFF") (Page 131).
• The Main Site can operate the cameras of all sites, and Sub Sites can operate their own camera and
the camera of the site being displayed as the main display at the Main Site.
• For video conference calls with multiple connections that use an internal MCU, in order for a sub site
to control a camera of another site, the main site's "Camera control transmitting" setting (default:
"OFF") must be set to "ON" (Page 126), and the "CAM ctrl from remote site(s)" setting (default
"OFF") must be set to "ON" (Page 131).
Operating your own video camera directly

You can directly perform PTZ (pan/tilt/zoom) operations from
the home screen and the video conference call screen using
the remote control.
1. [ ][ ]: Tilt the video camera up/down.
2. [ ][ ]: Pan the video camera left/
right.
1, 2
3. [ZOOM (+/-)]: Zoom in/zoom out the video
camera.
3

Note
• Your own video camera’s image will be displayed when operations are performed during a call so that
you can confirm the operations. If no operation is made for approximately 3 seconds, the original screen
is displayed.
Operation from the video camera menu

1 Press [CAM CTRL].
• The site selection dialogue box is displayed.
2, 3
1
3
Note
• After the site selection dialogue box is displayed,
if no operations are performed within
approximately 10 seconds, the dialogue box will
disappear.
2 Use [ ][ ] to select the site to display and press
[ENTER].
• The camera control screen is displayed.

3 Press the buttons on the remote control to operate the

video camera.
[ZOOM (+/-)]: Zoom in/zoom out
[ ][ ]: Pan the video camera left/right.
[ ][ ]: Tilt the video camera up/down.
• The movement continues as long as you hold down

the button, and stops when you release the button.
For finer control of the movement, press the button
and immediately release it, and repeat this in
succession.
• To return to the video conference call screen, press
[BACK].
Note
• You can press [FULL SCREEN] on the remote control to display/hide the guide area. You can specify
in the administrator menu (Page 153) whether the entire guide area is hidden, or only a portion of it.
• In the following cases, you will not be able to control a video camera, even if you press [CAM CTRL].
– While displaying the unit information screen or the connections status screen.
– While displaying a dialogue box.

Registering a Preset
When you are not on a video conference call, you can register up to 9 presets (pan, tilt, zoom position, etc.)
of the video camera connected as the main or sub video camera on your side.
Note
• Preset registration can only be performed when using video cameras that support preset functions.
For details, contact your dealer.
• The features that can be used may be limited depending on your video camera model.
(e.g., A video camera with only a zoom feature)
1 Press [Home].
Note
• If you are registering presets for the sub video 1, 8
camera, press [CAMERA SUB].
5, 7
2 Press [CAM CTRL].
• The camera control screen for your own video 3, 6
camera is displayed. 2
5
3 Press [G].
• The preset screen is displayed.

4 Press a numeric button (1–9) to select the preset

number to use.
• The selected preset number is displayed in the
upper right corner of the screen.
Note
• When a preset number that has already been
registered is selected and preset registration is
performed, that preset’s registered information
will be overwritten.
5 Press the buttons on the remote control to adjust the
video camera’s preset.
[ZOOM (+/-)]: Zoom in/zoom out
[ ][ ]: Pan the video camera left/right.
[ ][ ]: Tilt the video camera up/down.
6 Press [G].
• A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings is
displayed.
7 Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER].
• The preset screen is displayed.
Note
• To continue making settings, repeat steps 4–7.
8 Press [Home].
Note
• Preset registration information for a video
camera is saved in that video camera. If a video
camera is initialised, its preset registration
information will be lost. In such cases, preset
registration must be performed on the unit again.

Recalling a Registered Preset

During a video conference call, you can set your own video camera’s direction, zoom and magnifier settings,
etc., to the desired state by selecting a registered preset.
Note
• For details about compatible video camera models, contact your dealer.
• You can recall a preset that was set by the other party for the other party’s video camera during a video
conference call.
1 Press [CAM CTRL].
3
Note
• After the site selection dialogue box is displayed,
if no operations are performed within
approximately 10 seconds, the dialogue box will
disappear.
2 Use [ ][ ] to select "Local Site" and press
[ENTER].
3 Press a numeric button (1–9) to select the preset

number that you want to recall.
• The direction and zoom of your video camera will
change to that of the registered preset.

Changing Video Camera Settings

Whether or not you are on a video conference call, you can set the brightness and white balance, etc., of the
video camera connected as the main or sub video camera on your side.
Note
• You may not be able to change the settings depending on your video camera model. For details about
compatible video camera models, contact your dealer.
1 Press [CAM CTRL].
2, 4
Note
• After the site selection dialogue box is displayed, if no
operations are performed within approximately 10 seconds,
the dialogue box will disappear.
2 Use [ ][ ] to select "Local Site" and press [ENTER].


3 Press [MENU].
• The camera menu screen is displayed.
4 Use [ ][ ] to select the item you want to set, and press

[ENTER].
• The setting screen for the selected item is displayed.
Note
• The items are displayed across 2 screens. You can display
all items by pressing [R] (or [ ]) to move to the next screen
and pressing [B] (or [ ]) to move to the previous screen.
• Some items may not be displayed depending on your video
camera model.
• While you are configuring settings on the camera menu
screen, other parties cannot control your video camera.
"Brightness" screen
"Brightness Mode": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to select
"Auto" or "Manual".
Note
• When "Manual" is selected, you can adjust the brightness
by pressing the buttons on the remote control.
[B]: Dark
[R]: Light

"White Balance" screen

This function adjusts the colour so that white colours always appear
white under various types of light sources.
"White Balance": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to select the

desired value for the white balance ("Auto", "Indoor 1", "Indoor
2", "Outdoor (Sunny)", "Outdoor (Cloudy)", or "Calibrate").
Note
• Unless the colour is unnatural due to the light source, for
instance, select "Auto".
• "Indoor 1" is recommended if the light source is an
incandescent lamp, etc. "Indoor 2" is recommended if the
light source is a warm, white fluorescent lamp, sodium
vapour lamp, etc.
• When "Calibrate" is selected, you can adjust the white
balance. Perform the following procedure:
1. Press [ENTER].
• If the white balance had been set before by
selecting "Calibrate", that previously set state will
be recalled.
2. Turn a piece of white paper toward the video camera.
3. Press [G].
"Focus" screen: Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input:
"Focus Position": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to select

"Center" or "Sides (Wide)".
"Focus Mode": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to select
"Auto" or "Manual".
Note
• When "Manual" is selected, you can adjust the focus by
pressing the buttons on the remote control.
[B]: Near
[R]: Far
"Backlight" screen
This function adjusts the colour so that backlit objects do not appear
dark.
"Backlight Compensation": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to

select "ON" or "OFF".
"Flicker" screen
This function corrects screen flicker.
"Flicker Compensation": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to

select "ON" or "OFF".

"Digital Zoom" screen

This function crops the centre part of the video image and enlarges
it through digital processing.
"Digital Zoom": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to select "ON"

or "OFF".
"Magnifier Settings" screen

This function crops a part of the video image and displays it in the
four corners of the screen.
"Magnifier": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to select "ON" or

"OFF".
Note
• If you want to use the magnifier function, perform the following procedure:
1. Select "ON" and press [ENTER].

• Your own image is displayed in full screen, and a magnified image of your own is
displayed in the upper right subscreen.

2. Configure the advanced settings of the magnifier by pressing the [G] button on the remote
control.
Note
• The magnifier settings can be registered as a preset (Page 95).
(To change which position to magnify):

If you want to change which content to magnify, adjust the magnification position by pressing
[ ][ ][ ][ ] to move the frame that indicates the area to magnify.
(To change the zoom level of the magnified image):

If you want to change the size of the magnified image displayed in the subscreen, press
[ZOOM (+)] to zoom in, and press [ZOOM (-)] to zoom out.
(To change the screen layout):

If you want to change the position of the magnified image on the screen, press [Y]. Each
time you press [Y], the position of the magnified image will change in the following order:
upper right lower right lower left upper left
Example: When the dotted-line part is magnified and

displayed in the upper left subscreen.
3. To return to the magnifier settings screen, press [BACK].

To return to the camera menu screen, press [MENU].
"Sharpness" screen
This function adjusts the sharpness of the contours of images.
"Sharpness": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to select "High", "Medium", "Low", or "Off".
"Noise Filter" screen
This function filters the image noise when there is low illumination, etc. If a high setting is used, residual
images may be increased.
"Noise Filter": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to select "High", "Medium", "Low", or "Off".
Note
• After completing settings on each settings screen, press [ENTER]. After that, pressing
[MENU] or [BACK] will display the camera menu screen.

Displaying the Connection Status
D

s
You can confirm the connection status of the network and peripheral devices.
1 Press [STATUS].
y
• The connections status screen is displayed. A "–"

i
mark is displayed next to any network or peripheral 1

n
devices connection that is not in normal operation or

g
h
not connected. 2
e
2 Press [BACK].
t
• The display returns to the screen in use before the

u
connections status screen was viewed.

s
Note
• During a call, press [STATUS] twice at step 1.
• "Digital" is not displayed for "MIC Input" for the
KX-VC1000.
• If the KX-VC1000 has not been expanded for
HDMI Dual Monitor support, "HDMI 2" is not
displayed for "Video Output".
• "HDMI 3" for "Video Output" and "LAN 2" for
"Network" are only displayed for the
KX-VC1600/KX-VC2000.

Displaying Unit Information

Note
• Describes the information displayed for devices other than those that are currently being used in a
multicast. For the display of information for devices that are currently being used in a multicast, refer
to "Confirming the Transmission Status During a Multicast (Multicast Terminal) (Page 181)" and
"Confirming the Transmission Status During a Multicast (Relay Terminal/Receiver Terminal)
(Page 182)".
1 Press [STATUS] twice.
• The unit information screen is displayed.
1
• The unit information display screen is displayed over 2 to 3 screens.

To view all the items, press [R] to move to the next page, and press
[B] to move to the previous page.
Note
• The status of communication encryption (ON/OFF/Best effort)
is displayed under "Encryption (SIP)"/"Encryption (H.
323)"/"Encryption (NAT Traversal)".
• When not in a video conference call, the first and second pages
display information for your own site.
• When in a video conference call, the first page displays
information for the other party’s site and second and third pages
display information for your own site. The first page of information
can be used to confirm the network’s status during a call,
including the connection bandwidth and the packet loss ratio.
• During a multiple-party video conference call, pressing [G] on the
first page will display the site selection dialogue box, where the
displayed site can be changed. [ ][ ] can also be used instead
of [G] to change the displayed site. When using a KX-VC1000
that has not been expanded for 4 Point Built-in MCU support,
[G], [ ] and [ ] are unavailable.
• The site that has a black line displayed on the left in the site
selection dialogue box is the site with the lowest bandwidth (if
there are two types of communication groups due to "Secondary
Bandwidth Selection" (Page 126), a black line is displayed in
the site with the lowest bandwidth for each group).

Contacts and Settings
4. Use [
Adding Contacts to the ][ ] to select the following items for input:
"Site": Enter a name for the contact (up to 24
Contact List characters) (Page 190).
"Speed Dial": Enter a speed dial number (1–600).
You can register the information of up to 600 contacts "Max. Bandwidth": Press [ENTER] and use [ ]
in the contact list. [ ] to select the maximum allowed bandwidth to
be used ("256 kbps"–"18 Mbps", or "Not
Note Specified" [default]).
• If a video conference call is received while data
is being entered, a dialogue box to confirm if you Note
answer a video conference call is displayed. • When "Not Specified" is selected, the
Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" or "No" and press maximum bandwidth that is set on the
[ENTER]. connection settings screen (Page 122) is
– When "Yes" is selected, you can answer a applied.
video conference call while any unsaved • The maximum bandwidth during a video
data is lost. conference call adjusts to that of the party
– When "No" is selected, you can continue that has set the lowest bandwidth for the
entering the data. maximum bandwidth setting among all
• You can use the administrator menu to prohibit participating parties.
adding, editing, and deleting items in the • Video conferences cannot use more
contacts list (Page 153). bandwidth than the maximum bandwidth
setting set by your dealer. For details,
contact your dealer.
Registering a New Contact "Connection mode": Press [ENTER] and use
[ ][ ] to select the connection mode (call type)
1. Press [MENU]. ("IP Mode (SIP)", "IP Mode (H.323)", or "NAT
• The Menu screen is displayed. Traversal Mode").
"Address": Enter an IP address (or host name),
2. Use [ ][ ] to select "Contact List" and press SIP URI (or SIP user name), H.323 extension, H.
[ENTER]. 323 name, MCU’s conference room number@IP
address, or connection number.
3. Press [B].
Note
• The contact list registration screen is displayed.
• When entering an IPv4 address, if the IP
address contains 1 or 2 digit numbers, enter
these numbers as they are. Do not enter like
[.001].
– Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001]
• For the IPv6 address input format, refer to
Page 47.
• When entering an IPv6 address with a port
number appended, enclose the IPv6
address in square brackets.
(Input example) [2001:db8::10]:5060
• See Page 47 for details about the
characters that can be input for address
entry.
• If the other party has the same SIP domain
name as yours, you can register only their
SIP user name. If the other party has a
different SIP domain name from yours, their

SIP domain name must be entered along 5. Press [G].

with their SIP user name. • The contact list edit screen is displayed.
• If the SIP domain name is not entered, your
own SIP domain name is automatically
appended to the registered contact. This
may result in a different, unintended party
being registered as a contact, so be careful
when entering a contact’s information.
• When using H.323, you can also call by
entering the other party’s IP address (or
host name) %H.323 extension (or H.323
name).
• Enter a standards-compliant value.
For details, contact your network
administrator.
5. Press [G].
• A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings
is displayed. 6. Use [ ][ ] to select the item you want to edit and
make any changes.
• The contact list screen is displayed. 7. Press [G].
Note • A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings
is displayed.
• To continue entering another contact, press
[B] and repeat steps 4–6. 8. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER].
• The contact list details screen is displayed.
7. Press [Home].
• The Home screen is displayed. 9. Press [Home].
Editing Contact Information

1. Press [MENU]. Deleting a Contact
• The Menu screen is displayed. 1. Press [MENU].
2. Use [ ][ ] to select "Contact List" and press
[ENTER].
• The contact list screen is displayed.
3. Use [ ][ ] to select the contact you want to edit.

• You can use [ ][ ] or the numeric buttons of
the remote control to select the displayed tab
(Page 53).
4. Press [ENTER].
• The contact list details screen is displayed.

2. Use [ ][ ] to select "Contact List" and press

[ENTER]. 3. Use [ ][ ] to select the single-party entry you
• The contact list screen is displayed. want to add as a contact, and press [B].
• The contact list registration screen is displayed.
3. Use [ ][ ] to select the contact you want to

delete. 4. Use [ ][ ] to select the necessary items and
• You can use [ ][ ] or the numeric buttons of input information.
the remote control to select the displayed tab
(Page 53). 5. Press [G].
4. Press [R]. is displayed.
• A dialogue box to confirm the deletion is
displayed. 6. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER].
• The outgoing or incoming call history screen is
5. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER]. displayed, depending on which of the screens
• The contact list screen is displayed. you displayed in step 2.
6. Press [Home]. 7. Press [Home].

• The Home screen is displayed. • The Home screen is displayed.
Registering a Contact from the

Call History
You can register a contact to the contact list from the
call history.
1. Press [MENU].
2. Use [ ][ ] to select "Call History" and press

[ENTER].
• The outgoing call history screen is displayed.
Note
• To refer to the incoming call history,
press [G].

"Group": Enter a name for the profile (up to 24

Registering a Profile characters) (Page 190).
You can register the settings required for starting for a "Entry Restriction": Use [ ][ ] to select
video conference call in advance as a profile, including whether to restrict sites that have not been
the sites that can join the call, the communication type, registered from joining a conference room.‘
and the screen layout. Up to 20 profiles can be set. – "ON": Entry to conference rooms is restricted.
– "OFF" (default): Entry to conference rooms is
Note not restricted.
• To use profiles with the KX-VC1000, you must "Site name display": Use [ ][ ] to select
use an activation key to enable 4 Point Built-in whether to display site names during a
MCU support (Page 20). multiple-party connection.
– "ON" (default): Display site names.
– "OFF": Do not display site names.
Registering a New Profile Note
1. Press [MENU]. • For images displayed using HDMI 1 at the
• The Menu screen is displayed. main site, you can display the name of each
site on the layout screen. Note, however,
2. Use [ ][ ] to select "Profile" and press that when using PwithP or SideBySide for
[ENTER]. camera or content layout, the site name is
• The profile list screen is displayed. not displayed even when using HDMI 1
(Page 150).
3. Use [ ][ ] to select ""Not Registered"". • When using presentation mode, site names
are displayed in the composite image of sub
4. Press [B]. sites.
• The profile settings screen is displayed. "Other Site's Audio": Press [ENTER] and use
[ ][ ] to select the site whose audio you want to
mute during a multiple-party connection.
– "Mix (Auto)" (default): Audio from the loudest
4 sites is automatically mixed together.
– "Mix (Selection)": The audio from the selected
sites (up to 4) is mixed together.
– "Mute": Mutes the other site's audio.
Note
• When "Mix (Selection)" is selected, set
"Audio Mixing Site" (set "Site" settings
before setting "Audio Mixing Site").
"MCU Mode": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to
5. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input
select the MCU mode used when starting a video
Note conference.
– "Discussion" (default): The same image is
• The items are displayed over 2 screens. If
displayed for the main site and sub sites. This
you are not entering text, you can move to
mode is suited to discussion-style conferences.
the next or previous screen by pressing
– "Presentation": The main site sees a
[R] or [B], respectively.
composite image including the sub sites, and
• While performing step 5, you can configure
the sub sites see the image from the main site
"Site" (explained in steps 6 to 8) and
only. This mode is suited to lecture-style
"Audio Mixing Site" (explained in steps 9
conferences.
to 11), however, you must configure
"Screen Layout (Discussion)": Press [ENTER]
"Site" before you configure "Audio Mixing
and use [ ][ ] to select the screen layout for
Site".
Discussion Mode.

– "Auto" (default): Automatically changes the – "Specified Position": Displays each sub site's
layout depending on the number of sites joining image in the specified position.
a video conference call.
– "CP1" to "CP28": The selected screen layout Note
is used (Page 73). • When "Specified Position" is selected,
"Screen Layout (Presentation)": Press [ENTER] sites are displayed in the display position
and use [ ][ ] to select the screen layout for determined by their priority, which is
Presentation Mode. determined by the "Site" ID assigned to
– "Auto" (default): Automatically changes the their profile settings (lower IDs have
layout depending on the number of sites joining priority).
a video conference call. For information about the relationship
– "CP1" to "CP28": The selected screen layout between display priority order and display
is used (Page 73). positions, see (Page 73).
"Main Position (Discussion)": Press [ENTER] "Display position of local site": Press [ENTER]
and use [ ][ ] to select the screen to display as and use [ ][ ] to select the display position of
the main display (display priority 1). your site (display priority position; 1 (default) to 24).
– "Local Site" (default): Displays your own site.
Note
– "Voice Activation 1": The site with the loudest
volume is automatically displayed as the main • This setting is only available when
display. "Specified Position" is selected for "Main
– "Voice Activation 2 (Local Site)": Your own Position (Discussion)".
site's image is displayed as the main display, • If the specified display position is greater
and the site with the loudest volume at the time than the number of connected sub sites, the
is displayed as display priority 2. display position automatically moves
– "Voice Activation 2 (Site 1)" to "Voice forward.
Activation 2 (Site 30)": The selected site is • For information about the relationship
displayed as the main display, and the site with between display priority order and display
the loudest volume at the time is displayed as positions, see (Page 73).
display priority 2. "Display position setting": Press [ENTER] and
– "Site 1" to "Site 30": The selected site is use [ ][ ] to select what happens when the site
displayed as the main display. assigned to the display position is not connected.
– "Specified Position": Displays each site's – "Move forward" (default): Available sites move
image in the specified position. forward in their display position.
– "Black screen": A black screen is displayed for
Note
any sites that are not connected.
• When "Specified Position" is selected, the
main site is displayed at the position Note
specified by "Display position of local • This setting is only available when
site". Sub sites are displayed in the display "Specified Position" is selected for "Main
position (except for the main site's display Position (Discussion)" or "Main Position
position) determined by their priority, which (Presentation)".
is determined by the "Site" ID assigned to
their profile settings (lower IDs have
priority).
For information about the relationship
between display priority order and display
positions, see (Page 73).
"Main Position (Presentation)": Press [ENTER]
and use [ ][ ] to select the screen to display as
the main display (display priority 1).
– "Site 1" (default) to "Site 30": The selected site
is displayed as the main display.

6. Use [ ][ ] to select "Site" and press [ENTER]. – "IP Mode (H.323)": H.323 is used for
• The site selection screen is displayed. communication.
– "NAT Traversal Mode": NAT Traversal
Mode is used for communication.
"Address": Enter an IP address (or host
name), SIP URI (or SIP user name), H.323
extension, H.323 name, MCU’s conference
room number@IP address, or connection
number.
Press [G].
When selecting "Contact list":

Use [ ][ ] to select the other party to
Note
register, and press [ENTER].
• If there are no registered contacts with a • The site selection screen is displayed.
" " mark in the selection column, a call will
not be made even if [START] is pressed. When selecting "Call History":
• Press [Y] to return to the profile settings • The outgoing call history selection screen is
screen (first page). displayed.
• Up to 30 connections can be registered, but Use [ ][ ] to select the other party to
the number of usable connections will be
automatically selected from the top after
invalid settings (""Not Registered"" and
"Connection mode (Call type)") are Note
excluded.
• After performing step 7, if you do not set
7. Use [ ][ ] to select ""Not Registered"" and "Audio Mixing Site" or any of the items in
press [B]. step 5, do not perform steps 8-11 and
• A dialogue box is displayed for selecting the proceed from step 12.
input method. 8. Press [Y].
The profile settings screen (first page) is displayed.
9. Use [ ][ ] to select "Audio Mixing Site" and
press [ENTER].
• The audio mixing site screen is displayed.
When "Input Address" is selected

• The address input screen is displayed.
Use [ ][ ] to select the following items
for input:
"Connection mode": Press [ENTER] and
use [ ][ ] to select the connection mode Note
(communication type) and press [ENTER]. • This setting is only necessary when "Other
– "IP Mode (SIP)" (default): SIP is used Site's Audio" is set to "Mix (Selection)".
for communication.

10. Use [ ][ ] to select the sites whose audio you

want to mix and press [ENTER].
• Press [ENTER] to select/deselect the desired
sites. You can select up to 4 sites.
Note
• If no sites are registered, only your own site
can be selected. Perform steps 6-8 first and
setup a site.
11. Press [G]
12. Press [G].
5. Use [ ][ ] to select the item you want to edit and
is displayed.
make any changes.
6. Press [G].
is displayed.
14. Press [Home].
• The Home screen is displayed. 7. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER].
Note • The profile list screen is displayed.
• To continue entering another profile, press [B]
from the profile list and repeat steps 3-13. 8. Press [Home].
Editing Profile Information

Deleting a Profile
1. Press [MENU].
• The Menu screen is displayed. 1. Press [MENU].
2. Use [ ][ ] to select "Profile" and press
[ENTER]. 2. Use [ ][ ] to select "Profile" and press
• The profile list screen is displayed. [ENTER].
3. Use [ ][ ] to select the profile you want to edit.
4. Press [B].
Note
• The items are displayed over 2 screens. If
you are not entering text, you can move to
the next or previous screen by pressing
[R] or [B], respectively.
3. Use [ ][ ] to select the profile you want to delete.
4. Press [R].
• A dialogue box to confirm the deletion is
displayed.

5. Use [ ][ ] to select "Temporary" or

5. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER]. "Permanent".
• The profile list screen is displayed. • The profile list screen is displayed and a "ü" is
displayed in the "Standby" column for the
6. Press [Home]. profile with a standby set.
Note
• If "Temporary" is selected, the profile
standby setting is removed if the unit is
Setting the Profile Standby restarted. If "Permanent" is selected, the
When an incoming call is received during standby, the profile standby setting is kept even after
specified conference registered to the profile is started. restarting the unit.
• If [BACK] is pressed, profile standby is not
Note set and the display is returned to the profile
• Even in the profile standby settings, there are list screen.
no restrictions to the call operations (such as 6. Press [Home].
how to make calls and addresses) during • The Home screen is displayed.
standby.
• During profile standby settings, if another profile
standby is configured, the first profile standby
that was configured is removed. Removing a Profile Standby
• For profiles that have "Entry Restriction" set 1. Press [MENU].
to "ON", calls are answered and conferences • The Menu screen is displayed.
are started with profile settings only if there is a
call from the sites registered in "Site". 2. Use [ ][ ] to select "Profile" and press
• The profile standby setting is set as standby for [ENTER].
the selected local site (page 113) from the
• The profile list screen is displayed and a "ü" is
moment it is set, and is only enabled while that
displayed in the "Standby" column for the
local site is selected. If the local site is changed,
profile with a standby set.
the profile standby is also changed to the
content of the changed local site while that local
3. Use [ ][ ] to select the profile standby you want
site is selected. to remove.
4. Press [G].
1. Press [MENU].
• A dialogue box for setting or removing profile
• The Menu screen is displayed. standby is displayed.
2. Use [ ][ ] to select "Profile" and press 5. Use [ ][ ] to select "Release".

[ENTER].
• The profile list screen is displayed and a "ü" is
• The profile list screen is displayed. deleted from the "Standby" column for the
profile with a standby removed.
3. Use [ ][ ] to select the profile standby you want
to use. Note
• If [BACK] is pressed, profile standby is not
Note
removed and the display is returned to the
• The ""Not Registered"" line cannot be profile list screen.
selected.
6. Press [Home].
4. Press [G]. • The Home screen is displayed.
• A dialogue box for setting or removing profile
standby is displayed.

"Name": Enter a device name for the local site.

Making Local Site "Connection mode": Press [ENTER] and use
Settings [ ][ ] to select a connection mode (IP Mode,

NAT Traversal Mode, IP / NAT Traversal Mode)
You can register up to 10 local sites. The same unit can (default: "IP Mode").
be used in multiple meeting rooms without the need to
change the network or connection mode settings. 5. Press [G].
Note is displayed.
• You can use the administrator menu to hide the
select local site screen (Page 153). 6. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER].
• The select local site screen is displayed.
Registering a Local Site

1. Press [MENU]. Selecting a Local Site
1. Press [MENU].
2. Use [ ][ ] to select "Select local site" and • The Menu screen is displayed.
press [ENTER].
• The select local site screen is displayed. 2. Use [ ][ ] to select "Select local site" and
press [ENTER].
3. Use [ ][ ] to select ""Not Registered"" and • The select local site screen is displayed.
press [B].
• The local site settings screen is displayed.
3. Use [ ][ ] to select the local site you want to use.
4. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input: Note

"Add Local Site": Press [ENTER], and use [ ] • For the currently selected local site,
[ ] to select a creation method. " " is displayed in "Selected".
– "Add New" (default): Create new entries. • ""Not Registered"" is displayed for sites
– "Copy from basic settings": Re-use the that have not been registered.
settings of the top row of the local site selection
screen (basic settings). 4. Press [G].
– "Copy from (1) 'Name'" to "Copy from (9) • A dialogue box to confirm the use of the
'Name'": The numbers 1 through 9 correspond selected local site is displayed.
to local site IDs. "Name" will be the device
names already set to local site IDs 1 through 9.


• The unit restarts automatically. 6. Press [Home].
Note
• When changing the connection mode, the time
required for a restart may depend on network
conditions.
• Restarting the unit once more will return the
local site to the basic settings (the first line of
the local site selection settings). To keep the
selection after restarting, set "Same setting
after restart" to "ON" (Page 156).
• System settings and administrator menu
settings can be performed for each local site.
When settings are changed and saved while the
local site is in the switched status, those settings
will be valid only when that local site is selected.
Deleting Local Site Information

1. Press [MENU].
2. Use [ ][ ] to select "Select local site" and

press [ENTER].
3. Use [ ][ ] to select the local site you want to

delete.
4. Press [R].
• A dialogue box to confirm deletion is displayed.


Changing System Settings/Performing System

Maintenance
You can set, change, and confirm the unit’s various function settings.
Note
• If a video conference call is received while data is being entered, a dialogue box to confirm if you answer
a video conference call is displayed.
• When "Yes" is selected, you can answer a video conference call while any unsaved data is lost.
• When "No" is selected, you can continue entering the data.
1. Press [MENU].
2. Use [ ][ ] to select "Settings" and press [ENTER].

• The system settings screen is displayed.
System Setting Screen List

A System Settings:
Sets the device’s name (Page 118).
B Set Date/Time:
Sets the date and time (Page 118).
C Network Settings:
Sets the network settings (Page 118).
D Call set up:
Sets items used during communication
(Page 121).
E MCU Settings:
Sets the settings for the built-in MCU
(Page 124).
[ ] [ ]
Previous Following
page page
[B] [R]

F One-Touch Set.:
Sets the one-touch connection numbers
displayed on the Home screen
(Page 127).
G Standby Setting:
Sets the time until screen standby mode
is activated (Page 127).
H Sound Settings:
Sets the sounds played at startup and
when a video conference call starts
(Page 127).
I MIC Setting:
Sets the positioning for proprietary
digital boundary microphones
(Page 128).
J Remote Ctrl ID:
Sets IDs for the remote control and the
main unit (Page 130).
[ ] [ ]
Previous Following
page page
[B] [R]
K Camera Settings:
Sets the camera at your own site
(Page 131).
L Language Setting:
Sets the display language (Page 131).
M USB Rec Settings:
Sets the recording mode, or starts and
stops recording when the unit is idle
(Page 132).
N Multicast Setting:
Sets the multicast feature (Page 175).
O USB Device Mode:
Changes the USB operation mode and
sets the image quality in USB Device
Mode (Page 132).
[ ] [ ]
Previous Following
page page
[B] [R]

P Admin login:
Shifts to the settings screen for the
administrator menu (Page 136).
Q System Info.:
You can display the setting information
of the main unit (Page 133).
R Enhancement:
You can check the features that have
been enabled due to the software
enhancement feature (Page 133).
S Network Test:
You can specify an IP address for
checking the network connection
(Page 134).
T Self Diag.:
You can check the video and audio
being sent to other parties from your own
site (Page 134).
[ ] [ ]
Previous Following
page page
[B] [R]
U License Info.:
You can display information about
licences and open source software
(Page 135).
V EULA:
You can display information about the
licence agreement (Page 135).
W Remote access:
Performs the operations so that dealers
can carry out maintenance remotely
(Page 135).
3. Use [ ][ ] to select an item to set, and press [ENTER].

• The selected screen is displayed. Perform settings following the descriptions of each screen (A
through W).
4. Press [Home].
Note
• "MIC Setting" is not displayed for the KX-VC1000.
• When using a KX-VC1000 that has not been expanded for 4 Point Built-in MCU support, "MCU
Settings" is not displayed.

Note
Setting the Unit Name
• For the KX-VC1000/KX-VC1300, "IP Address
1. Select "System Settings" and press [ENTER]. (LAN 1)" (setting), "IP Address (LAN 1)", and
• The unit name setting screen is displayed. "Subnet mask (LAN 1)" are respectively
displayed as "IP Address" (setting), "IP
2. Enter a unit name (up to 24 characters) Address", and "Subnet mask".
(Page 190). 1. Select "Network Settings" and press [ENTER].
• The network settings screen is displayed.
3. Press [G].
• A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings 2. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input:
is displayed.
"IP Address (LAN 1)"(setting): Use [ ][ ] to
select whether the IP address information for this
4. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER]. unit ("IP Address (LAN 1)", "Subnet mask (LAN
• The system settings screen is displayed. 1)", "Default Gateway") will be obtained
automatically from a DHCP server or will be set
manually.
– "Auto" (default): Obtain the IP address
Setting the Date and Time information automatically.
– "Manual": Set the IP address information
1. Select "Set Date/Time" and press [ENTER]. manually.
• The date/time settings screen is displayed.
Note
2. Use [ ][ ] to select the item and input • Even if you have selected "Auto", you still
information. may not be able to acquire an IP address
• Enter the year (4 digits), month (1–2 digits), day due to problems such as network
(1–2 digits), time (24 hour display), and select congestion. In this case, "Address is not
the date format (Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/ assigned" is displayed in the upper right of
Year, Year/Month/Day) and hour display format the Home screen. Contact your network
(12h/24h). administrator.
"IP Address (LAN 1)": Enter the IP address of the
3. Press [G]. unit.
• A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings "Subnet mask (LAN 1)": Enter the subnet mask.
and system restart after saving is displayed. "Default Gateway": Enter the IP address of the
default gateway.
Note
• The system will automatically restart to reflect
changes to system settings. • "IP Address (LAN 1)", "Subnet mask
(LAN 1)", and "Default Gateway" can be
entered only if "IP Address (LAN
1)" (setting) is set to "Manual".
Making Network Settings • If the value for "IP Address (LAN 1)",
Note "Subnet mask (LAN 1)", or "Default
Gateway" contains 1 or 2 digits numbers,
•The following items are displayed over 3 pages. enter these numbers as they are. Do not
If you are not entering text, you can move to the enter like [.001].
next or previous screen by pressing [R] or [B], Example: The IP address is [192.168.0.1].
respectively.
• When changing settings, press [G] on the
– Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001]
screen where the change was made to save the
settings. "DNS Server": Use [ ][ ] to select whether the
• You can use the administrator menu to hide the IP address information for the DNS servers
network settings screen (Page 153). ("Primary DNS Server", "Secondary DNS
Setting LAN1

Server") will be obtained automatically from a • Match settings according to the hub or
DHCP server or will be set manually. router to be connected.
– "Auto" (default): Obtain the IP address • When "10 Mbps (Fix)" is set, set the "Max.
information automatically. Bandwidth" of "Call set up" to 10 Mbps or
– "Manual": Set the IP address information lower (Page 122).
manually.
Note 3. If the settings for LAN1 are changed: Press [G].

• To select "Auto", "IP Address (LAN is displayed. Save the settings.
1)" (setting) must be set to "Auto".
• The DNS server setting is necessary to use To set IPv6: Press [R].
the following features. • The second page is displayed.
– Call by specifying the host name
– Setting the SIP server or gatekeeper To set LAN2: Press [R] twice, and then proceed to
address by host name step 6.
– Checking for software updates
– Downloading the latest version over the Setting IPv6
network
Note
"Primary DNS Server": Enter the IP address of the
primary DNS server. • For the KX-VC1000/KX-VC1300, "IPv6
"Secondary DNS Server": Enter the IP address of (LAN 1)", "IPv6 Address (LAN
the secondary DNS server. 1)" (setting), "IPv6 Address (LAN 1)" and
"Prefix length (LAN 1)" are respectively
Note displayed as "IPv6", "IPv6
• "Primary DNS Server" and "Secondary Address" (setting), "IPv6 Address", and
DNS Server" can be entered only if "DNS "Prefix length".
Server" is set to "Manual".
• If the value for "Primary DNS Server" or 4. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input:
"Secondary DNS Server" contains 1 or 2 "IPv6 (LAN 1)": Select "ON" or "OFF" (default).
digits numbers, enter these numbers as
they are. Do not enter like [.001]. Note
Example: The IP address is [192.168.0.1]. • When "ON" is selected, both the IPv4
– Correct entry: [192.168.0.1] address and IPv6 address will be displayed
– Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001] on the unit information screen. On the upper
"LAN Mode (LAN 1)": Press [ENTER] and use right of the home screen, only the IPv4
[ ][ ] to select the LAN mode. address is displayed.
– "1 Gbps (Auto)": Negotiates with the other "IPv6 Address (LAN 1)" (setting): Select whether
party to determine the LAN mode. The the IPv6 address will be obtained automatically or
maximum setting is 1 Gbps (full duplex). will be set manually.
– "1 Gbps (Fix)": Fixes the LAN mode to 1 Gbps – "Auto (SLAAC)" (default): Automatically
(full duplex). obtains IP address information from the router.
– "100 Mbps (Auto)" (default): Negotiates with – "Auto (DHCP)": Automatically obtains IP
the other party to determine the LAN mode. The address information from the DHCP server.
maximum setting is 100 Mbps (full duplex). – "Manual": IP address information is set
– "100 Mbps (Fix)": Fixes the LAN mode to 100 manually.
Mbps (full duplex).
Note
Mbps (full duplex). • When "Auto (DHCP)" is set, the default
gateway address is obtained from the RA
Note (router advertisement).
• This setting is only displayed for the • Even if "Auto (SLAAC)" or "Auto
KX-VC2000. (DHCP)" is set, in some cases the IP
address information cannot be obtained

due to network failures or other – Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001]

occurrences. In such cases, the IPv6 "IPv6 (LAN 2)": Select "ON" or "OFF" (default).
address is displayed as "–" on the unit "IPv6 Address (LAN 2)": Enter the LAN2 IPv6
information screen. Contact your network address.
administrator. "Prefix length (LAN 2)": Enter the prefix length of
"IPv6 Address (LAN 1)": Enter this unit’s IPv6 the IPv6 address.
address.
"Prefix length (LAN 1)": Enter the prefix length of Note
the IPv6 address. • When "IPv6 (LAN 1)" is set to "OFF" and
"Default Gateway (IPv6)": Enter the IPv6 address "IPv6 (LAN 2)" is set to "ON", to use the
of the default gateway for IPv6. host name to set "SIP Server Address" of
"SIP Settings" or "Gatekeeper Address"
Note of "H.323 Settings", set "Primary DNS
• "IPv6 Address (LAN 1)" and "Prefix Server (IPv6)" and "Secondary DNS
length (LAN 1)" can only be input when Server (IPv6)" in step 4. Then, in steps 7–
"IPv6 Address (LAN 1)" (setting) is set to 12, set routing for communication with the
"Manual". DNS server.
• For the input format for "IPv6 Address • For the input format for "IPv6 Address
(LAN 1)" and "Default Gateway (IPv6)", (LAN 2)", refer to Page 47.
refer to Page 47. • For "IPv6 Address (LAN 2)", set your
• For "IPv6 Address (LAN 1)", set your network’s global address.
network’s global address. • If "ON" is not set for "LAN 2", "Routing
"Primary DNS Server (IPv6)": Enter the IPv6 Settings" will not be displayed. Once "LAN
address of the primary DNS server for IPv6. 2" is set to "ON", press [G] to save the
"Secondary DNS Server (IPv6)": Enter the IPv6 settings and close the setting screen. Then,
address of the secondary DNS server for IPv6. select "Network Settings" and set the
routing.
Note
• For the input format for "Primary DNS Routing settings for LAN2 (KX-VC1600/
Server (IPv6)" and "Secondary DNS KX-VC2000)
Server (IPv6)", refer to Page 47.
7. Use [ ][ ] to select "Routing Settings" and
5. If the settings for IPv6 are changed: Press [G]. press [ENTER].
• A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings • The routing list screen is displayed.
is displayed. Save the settings.
To set LAN2: Press [R]. 8. Use [ ][ ] to select ""Not Registered"".
• The second page is displayed.
9. Press [B].
Making LAN2 Settings (KX-VC1600/KX-VC2000) • The routing settings screen is displayed.
6. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input:
"LAN 2": select "ON" or "OFF" (default) for LAN2. 10. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input:
"IP Address (LAN 2)": Input the IP address for "IP Address Format": Specifies whether an IPv4
LAN2. address or IPv6 address will be used.
"Subnet mask (LAN 2)": Input the subnet mask for "Destination": Input the IP address of the other
LAN2. party to communicate with using LAN2.
"Subnet mask": Input the subnet mask of the other
Note
party to communicate with using LAN2.
• If the value for "IP Address (LAN 2)" or "Prefix length": Enter the prefix length for the IPv6
"Subnet mask (LAN 2)" contains 1 or 2 address of the other party communicating using
digit numbers, enter these numbers as they LAN2.
are. Do not enter like [.001]. "Gateway": Input the gateway address for
Example: The IP address is [192.168.0.1]. communication with other parties that have been
– Correct entry: [192.168.0.1] set.

Note • The input "Destination" is converted to a

• "Subnet mask" can only be set when network address and then used. There is no
"IPv4" is set for "IP Address Format". need to register multiple destination IP
• "Prefix length" can only be set when addresses that have the same network
"IPv6" is set for "IP Address Format". address.
• If "IPv4" is set for "IP Address Format", 13. Press [BACK].
and "Destination", "Subnet mask", or • The system settings screen is displayed.
"Gateway" contains 1 or 2 digit numbers,
enter these numbers as they are. Do not
enter like [.001].
Making Connection Settings
– Correct entry: [192.168.0.1] Note
– Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001] • You can use the administrator menu to hide the
• For the input format for "Destination" and connection settings screen (Page 153).
"Gateway" when "IPv6" is set for "IP
Address Format", refer to Page 47. 1. Select "Call set up" and press [ENTER].
• The connection settings screen is displayed.
"LAN Mode (LAN 2)": Press [ENTER] and use
[ ][ ] to select the LAN mode.
– "1 Gbps (Auto)": Negotiates with the other
• The following items are displayed over 3 pages.
party to determine the LAN mode. The
To view all the items, press [R] to move to the
maximum setting is 1 Gbps (full duplex).
next page, and press [B] to move to the
– "1 Gbps (Fix)": Fixes the LAN mode to 1 Gbps previous page.
(full duplex).
– "100 Mbps (Auto)" (default): Negotiates with Note
the other party to determine the LAN mode. The • You must save the settings separately
maximum setting is 100 Mbps (full duplex). for each screen on which you changed
– "100 Mbps (Fix)": Fixes the LAN mode to 100 the settings.
Mbps (full duplex). • When "SIP" is set to "OFF" on the call
– "10 Mbps (Fix)": Fixes the LAN mode to 10 type settings screen (Page 143),
Mbps (full duplex). "Encryption (SIP)" cannot be set.
Note • When "H.323" is set to "OFF" on the
call type settings screen (Page 143),
• "LAN Mode (LAN 2)" is not available if "Encryption (H.323)" cannot be set.
"LAN 2" is set to "OFF" in step 6.
• This setting is only displayed for the "Answer Mode": Use [ ][ ] to select how to
KX-VC2000. answer video conference calls ("Manual" [default],
• Match settings according to the hub or "Auto", or "Forced Answer") (Page 63).
router to be connected. "More than one incoming call": Use [ ][ ] to
• When "10 Mbps (Fix)" is set, set the "Max. select whether to accept calls from Sub Sites to
Bandwidth" of "Call set up" to 10 Mbps or make video conferences of more than 2 parties.
lower (Page 122). – "ON" (default): Allow calls with more than 2
parties.
11. Press [G]. – "OFF": Do not allow calls to have more than 2
parties.
is displayed. Note
• For sites operating as "Main Sites" in
12. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER]. multiple-party video conference calls using
• The routing list screen is displayed. the built-in MCU, select "ON".
Note • When using a KX-VC1000 that has not
been expanded for 4 Point Built-in MCU
• To continue setting another routing, repeat support, "More than one incoming call" is
steps 8–12. not displayed.

"Max. Bandwidth": Press [ENTER] and use [ ] – "Auto" (default): Automatically selects either
[ ] to select the maximum allowed bandwidth to dual stream or single stream.
be used (256 kbps–24 Mbps) (default: 9.0 Mbps). – "Single stream": Fixed to single stream.
"Encode rate": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ]
Note to select the encoding rate ratio for the main stream
• Except for the KX-VC2000, settings from and sub stream.
256 kbps to 18 Mbps are available. – "Main (30%) < Sub (70%)": Prioritise the sub
• Even if 24 Mbps is selected, the maximum stream during calls.
bandwidth for transmission between 2 – "Main (50%) = Sub (50%)" (default): Use the
parties is 18 Mbps (KX-VC2000). same priorities during calls.
"Max. Bandwidth Per Site (LAN 1)": Press – "Main (70%) > Sub (30%)": Prioritise the main
[ENTER], and then use [ ][ ] to select the stream during calls.
maximum bandwidth per site ("256 kbps" - "Video Quality (Main Camera)"/"Video Quality
"18 Mbps", or "Not Specified") (default: "Not (Sub Camera)": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ]
Specified"). to select between prioritising smooth movement or
"Max. Bandwidth Per Site (LAN 2)" (KX-VC1600/ image quality for video.
KX-VC2000): Press [ENTER], and then use [ ] – "Motion" (default): Prioritise smooth
[ ] to select the maximum bandwidth per site movement.
("256 kbps" - "18 Mbps", or "Not Specified") – "Sharpness": Prioritise image quality.
(default: "Not Specified"). – "Resolution (Max. Full HD)": Fixes the
resolution to full HD or the other party’s
Note maximum resolution, whichever is lower,
• For the KX-VC1300, "Max. Bandwidth Per regardless of the communication bandwidth.
Site (LAN 1)" is displayed as "Max. – "Resolution (Max. HD)": Fixes the resolution
Bandwidth Per Site". to HD or the other party’s maximum resolution,
• When using a KX-VC1000 that has been whichever is lower, regardless of the
expanded for 4 Point Built-in MCU support, communication bandwidth.
"Max. Bandwidth Per Site (LAN 1)" is "Video Quality (PC)": Press [ENTER] and use
displayed as "Max. Bandwidth Per Site". [ ][ ] to select between prioritising smooth
If the feature is not expanded, this item is movement or image quality for video.
not displayed. – "Motion": Prioritise smooth movement.
• During a 2-party call, the bandwidth of the – "Sharpness" (default): Prioritise image quality.
site with the lowest-set maximum "Quality of Service": Use [ ][ ] to select
bandwidth is applied, and in a multiple-party between prioritising sound or images when
call, bandwidth is applied according to each bandwidth is low or the network is congested.
site’s maximum bandwidth and the number – "Audio" (default): When bandwidth is low
of connected sites. However, when the sound quality is prioritised, and when the
value of "Max. Bandwidth Per network is congested sound disturbance is
Site" (excluding "Not Specified") is reduced.
smaller, the value of "Max. Bandwidth Per – "Video": Even when bandwidth is low or the
Site" is applied as the maximum bandwidth. network is congested, image quality is
• You cannot select a value that is higher than prioritised.
the maximum bandwidth set by the dealer. "Default MIC Mute set (Make Call)": Use [ ]
For details, contact your dealer.
[ ] to select whether the microphone will be muted
"Dual stream": Use [ ][ ] to select whether dual or not when making a call to start a video
stream communication is enabled. conference.
– "ON" (default): Enables dual stream – "ON": The microphone will be muted.
communication. – "OFF" (default): The microphone will not be
– "OFF" Disables dual stream communication. muted.
"Send Content Method": Press [ENTER], and "Default MIC Mute set (Incoming)": Use [ ]
then use [ ][ ] to select the contents sending [ ] to select whether to mute the microphone(s) at
method when dual stream is enabled. the start of a received video conference call.

– "ON": Mutes the microphone(s). "ON" set for encrypted communication. When
– "OFF" (default): Does not mute the "OFF" is set, communication is performed
microphone(s). without encryption.
"Call Limit time": Enter the maximum length of – "ON": Encryption is enabled.
time for the duration of a video conference call (in – "OFF" (default): Encryption is disabled.
hours and minutes). "Encryption (NAT Traversal)": Use [ ][ ] to
select whether encrypted communication is
Note
enabled.
• If you set 0 hours 0 minutes (default), the – "ON": Enables encrypted communication.
call time is unlimited. – "OFF" (default): Disables encrypted
• If the duration of a video conference call communication.
exceeds the specified length of time, the call
will be automatically disconnected. Note
"MIC detection": Use [ ][ ] to select whether to • "Encryption (SIP)" and "Encryption (H.
enable connection status detection for Boundary 323)" are displayed when IP mode or IP/
Microphones or a headset. NAT Traversal mode is being used.
– "ON" (default): Boundary Microphone/headset • "Encryption (NAT Traversal)" is
detection is enabled. displayed when NAT Traversal mode or IP/
– "OFF": Boundary Microphone/headset NAT Traversal mode is being used.
detection is disabled. • Be careful when changing encryption
settings because doing so may cause you
Note to become unable to communicate with
• When Boundary Microphones/headsets are other parties.
not being used, set this to "OFF". • Be aware that if encryption is disabled,
"Network Connection Status": Use [ ][ ] to eavesdropping might be possible on
networks that are not secured against such
select whether to display the network status
actions.
indication.
• If you cannot specify a value for
– "ON" (default): Displays the network status
"Encryption (SIP)"/"Encryption (H.
indication.
323)"/"Encryption (NAT Traversal)"
– "OFF": Hides the network status indication. because the setting is unavailable, contact
"Active call Menu": Use [ ][ ] to select whether your network administrator.
to display the guide when a video conference call
"Server Port": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to
begins.
select the port to use when connecting using NAT
– "ON" (default): Displays the guide.
Traversal Mode.
– "OFF": Hides the guide.
– "Default": A normally-used port will be
"Noise reduction": Use [ ][ ] to select whether
automatically selected.
to enable noise reduction when a video conference
– "Alternate" (default): Set when communication
call begins.
cannot be performed normally.
– "ON": Enables noise reduction.
– "OFF" (default): Disables noise reduction. Note
Note • Displayed when "Connection mode" is set

to "NAT Traversal Mode" or "IP / NAT
• "Noise reduction" is not displayed for the Traversal Mode".
KX-VC1000.
"Transmission Band Control": Use [ ][ ] to
"Encryption (SIP)": Use [ ][ ] to select whether select whether to enable transmission bandwidth
to enable encryption. control.
– "ON": Encryption is enabled. – "ON" (default): Enables transmission
– "OFF" (default): Encryption is disabled. bandwidth control.
"Encryption (H.323)": Press [ENTER] and use – "OFF": Disables transmission bandwidth
[ ][ ] to select whether to enable encryption. control.
– "Best effort": Enables encrypted
communication when the other party has

Note
• If "OFF" is set, other communications that
use the same network may be affected. 2 CP1
3. Press [G]. 3–4 CP4
is displayed. 5–6 CP6
7–8 CP8
• The system settings screen is displayed. 9 CP9
10 CP10
11-13 CP13
Setting the MCU 14-15 CP15
Note 16 CP16
• When using a KX-VC1000 that has not been 17-20 CP20
"MCU Settings" is not displayed in the system 21 CP21
settings screen. 22-24 CP24
1. Select "MCU Settings" and press [ENTER].
• The settings screen of the built-in MCU is • The screen layout during a conference call can
displayed. be selected from the following 15 patterns. The
2. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input: numbers in the layout configurations indicate
• The following items are displayed over 2 pages. each site’s image display priority.
To view all the items, press [R] to move to the
next page, and press [B] to move to the
previous page.
"MCU Mode": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to
select the MCU mode used when starting a video CP1 1
conference.
– "Discussion" (default): The same image is
displayed for the main site and sub sites. This
mode is suited to discussion-style conferences.
– "Presentation": The main site sees a
composite image including the sub sites, and CP2 1 2
the sub sites see the image from the main site
only. This mode is suited to lecture-style
conferences.
"Screen Layout (Discussion)": Press [ENTER]
and use [ ][ ] to select the screen layout for 1 2
Discussion Mode. CP4
– "Auto" (default): Automatically changes the 3 4
layout depending on the number of parties
joining a video conference call.
– "CP1" to "CP28": Sets the screen layout
2
manually. 1
CP6 3
Note 4 5 6
• When "Auto" is selected, the layout
changes automatically depending on the
number of sites joining the conference.

Layout Number Layout Configuration Layout Number Layout Configuration
2 1 2 5 6
7 8
1 3 3 4
9 10
CP8 4 CP24 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18
5 6 7 8 19 20 21 22 23 24
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 6 7 8 9 10
CP9 4 5 6 CP25 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20
7 8 9 21 22 23 24 25
2 3 4
1 2 1 5 6 7
8 9 10
CP10 3 4 5 6 CP28 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22
7 8 9 10 23 24 25 26 27 28
2 3 "Screen Layout (Presentation)": Press [ENTER]

1
4 5 and use [ ][ ] to select the screen layout for
CP13 6 7 8 9 Presentation Mode.
10 11 12 13 – "Auto" (default): Automatically changes the
layout depending on the number of parties
joining a video conference call.
2 – "CP1" to "CP28": Sets the screen layout
1
3 manually.
CP15
4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 Note
• When "Auto" is selected, the layout
changes automatically depending on the
1 2 3 4 number of sites joining the conference.
5 6 7 8
CP16 9 10 11 12 Number of Sites Layout Number
13 14 15 16
2 CP1
3 CP2
1 2
4–5 CP4
CP20 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 6–7 CP6
8–9 CP8
2 3 10 CP9
1 4 5
6 7
CP21 8 9 11 CP10
10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 21 12-14 CP13
15-16 CP15
17 CP16
18-21 CP20

Number of Sites Layout Number "DTMF for Content Sharing": Use [ ][ ] to

select whether to allow Sub Sites to share contents
22 CP21 using remote control operations.
– "ON" (default): Allow Sub Sites to perform
23-24 CP24 operations using the remote control.
– "OFF": Do not allow operations by Sub Sites
"Main Position (Discussion)": Press [ENTER]
using the remote control.
and use [ ][ ] to select the display method for
the main position. Note
– "Local Site" (default): Displays your own site. • When "ON" is set, content sharing can be
– "Voice Activation 1": The site with the loudest controlled using the [PC], [CAMERA
volume is automatically displayed as the main SUB], and [CAMERA MAIN] buttons, as
display. well as the numeric keypad (*10: Start
– "Voice Activation 2 (Local Site)": Your own sharing, *11: Stop sharing).
site’s image is displayed as the main display, "DTMF layout change": Use [ ][ ] to select
and the site with the loudest volume at the time
whether other parties can use remote control
is displayed as display priority 2.
operations to perform screen layout change
"Video switch time frame": Use [ ][ ] to select operations.
the time the screen’s display is fixed when the – "ON": Enable operations by Sub Sites using the
display is controlled according to audio (1 to 20 remote control.
seconds, default: 10 seconds).
– "OFF" (default): Disable remote control
"Site name display": Use [ ][ ] to select operations by Sub Sites.
whether to display site names when the display is "Auto move to CP1": Use [ ][ ] to select
split into multiple screens.
whether the function that switches the screen layout
– "ON" (default): Display site names. to CP1 when content sharing is started is enabled
– "OFF": Do not display site names. or not.
Note – "ON" (default): Switching to CP1 is enabled.
– "OFF": Switching to CP1 is disabled.
• For images displayed using HDMI 1 at the "Other Site's Audio": Press [ENTER] and use
main site, you can display the name of each
[ ][ ] to select the mode to combine audio from
site on the layout screen. Note, however,
Main Site with the audio from the other site.
that when using PwithP or SideBySide for
camera or content layout, the site name is – "Mix (Auto)" (default): Audio from the loudest
not displayed even when using HDMI 1 4 sites is automatically mixed together.
(Page 150). – "Mute": Mutes the audio of Sub Sites. Only the
• When using presentation mode, site names audio of the Main Site is output.
are displayed in the composite image of sub "Display far site's Mute icon": Use [ ][ ] to
sites. select whether the Sub Site audio status icon is
displayed.
"Local Camera Display of MCU Site": Select
whether to display an image of the main site as the – "ON" (default): The audio status icon is
displayed.
composite image in discussion mode using [ ]
– "OFF": The audio status icon is not displayed.
[ ].
"Display Presentation Mode icon": Use [ ]
– "ON" (default): Displays the image of the main
[ ] to select whether an icon is displayed to
site.
– "OFF": Does not display the image of the main indicate that the MCU mode is Presentation Mode.
site. – "ON" (default): The presentation icon will be
displayed.
"Camera control transmitting": Use [ ][ ] to
select whether to allow Sub Sites to operate the
– "OFF": The presentation icon will not be
displayed.
camera of main display site.
"Secondary Bandwidth Selection": Press
– "ON": Allow camera operation by Sub Sites.
[ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to select two types of
– "OFF" (default): Do not allow camera operation
communication group thresholds.
by Sub Sites.

– "Not Specified": Bandwidth threshold not 1. Use [ ][ ] to select the group name you want
considered. to register and press [ENTER].
– "256 kbps or more" – "2.0 Mbps or • The one-touch connection number settings
more" (default: "768 kbps or more"): Consider screen is displayed.
bandwidth to determine the two types of
communication group thresholds. 5. Press [G].
3. Press [G]. is displayed.
is displayed. 6. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER].
Making Screen Standby

Setting One-touch Connection Settings
Numbers When the remote control is not operated or a video
conference call is not received for a specified length of
Set the addresses or profiles assigned to the one-touch time, the unit enters standby mode. You can set the
connection numbers (1 to 5) displayed on the home length of time here.
screen. 1. Select "Standby Setting" and press [ENTER].
1. Select "One-Touch Set." and press [ENTER]. • The screen standby settings screen is
• The one-touch connection number settings displayed.
screen is displayed.
2. Enter the length of time (0–99) in minutes until the
2. Use [ ][ ] to select ""Not Registered"". unit enters screen standby mode (default: 10).
3. Press [B]. Note

• A dialogue box is displayed for selecting which • If you set "0", the unit will not enter screen
kind of input method to reference. standby mode automatically. However, if
you press the remote control’s
Note [STANDBY] button, the unit will enter
• When using a KX-VC1000 that has not screen standby mode even if "0" is set.
been expanded for 4 Point Built-in
MCU support, the contact list selection 3. Press [G].
screen is displayed. Proceed to "When • A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings
"Contact list" is selected:" in step 4. is displayed.
4. Use [ ][ ] to select the reference source, 4. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER].
"Contact list" or "Profile" and press [ENTER]. • The system settings screen is displayed.
When "Contact list" is selected:

The contact list selection screen is displayed.
1. Use [ ][ ] to select the other party to Making Sound Settings
• The one-touch connection number settings 1. Select "Sound Settings" and press [ENTER].
screen is displayed. • The sound settings screen is displayed.
When "Profile" is selected: 2. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input:
The profile list reference screen is displayed. "Welcome Screen Vol.": Press [ENTER] and use
[ ][ ] to select the volume level ("OFF", "Low",

"Medium" [default] or "High") played at the Note

start-up. • "MIC Setting" is not displayed in the system
"Ringback Tone Vol.": Press [ENTER] and use settings screen for the KX-VC1000.
[ ][ ] to select the volume level ("OFF", "Low",
"Medium" [default] or "High") of an outgoing call
ring. Setting the MIC Position
"Ring Tone Vol.": Press [ENTER] and use [ ] automatically
[ ] to select the volume level ("OFF", "Low",
1. Select "MIC Setting" and press [ENTER].
"Medium" [default] or "High") of an incoming call
ring. • The auto settings screen is displayed.
"Ringback Tone": Press [ENTER] and use [ ] Note
[ ] to select the calling sound pattern ("Pattern • If the manual settings screen is displayed,
1" to "Pattern 5") (default: "Pattern 1"). press [B] to return to the auto settings
"Ring Tone": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to screen.
select the incoming call sound pattern ("Pattern
1" to "Pattern 5") (default: "Pattern 1").
2. Press [G].
"Default Sound Lev.": Use [ ][ ] to select the • A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings
volume level (0–20) at the start of a video is displayed.
conference call (default: 16).
"Sound Pre-sets": Press [ENTER] and use [ ] 3. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER].
[ ] to select the tone ("More Highs", • The system settings screen is displayed.
"Standard" [default], "More Lows", "Voice" or
"Music") at the start of a video conference call. Note
Note
• Depending on how many Digital Boundary
Microphones are connected, the output
• You can listen to a sample of the following settings differ as follows:
items by pressing [R]. – 2 or more Digital Boundary
– "Welcome Screen Vol." Microphones: Monaural output
– "Ringback Tone Vol." – 1 Digital Boundary Microphone: Stereo
– "Ring Tone Vol." output
– "Ringback Tone" • When using Digital Boundary Microphones
– "Ring Tone" and an Analogue Boundary Microphone
• A music note icon will be displayed to the together, the output for all Boundary
right of the item being heard. Pressing [R] Microphones will be monaural.
will stop the playing of the item being heard.
3. Press [G]. Setting the MIC Position manually

• A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings 1. Select "MIC Setting" and press [ENTER].
is displayed. • The auto settings screen is displayed.
4. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER]. Note
• The system settings screen is displayed. • If the manual settings screen is displayed,
proceed to step 3.
2. Press [B].
Setting the MIC Position • The manual settings screen is displayed.
You can specify where a Digital Boundary Microphone
is conceptually positioned relative to the display. When
3. Use [ ][ ] to select the Digital Boundary
sounds are transmitted to another party, they are played Microphone you want to configure and press
in accordance with the specified positions, which [ENTER].
creates a stereo environment.

4. Use [ ][ ] to select the Digital Boundary When setting Digital Boundary Microphones
Microphone’s relative position. parallel with the display:
"Left side": Sounds on left side are played. Display Main video camera
"Right side": Sounds on right side are played.
"Center Mono": All sounds are played through Speaker Speaker
both the left and right speakers at the same volume.
"Center stereo": Sounds centred on the
microphone are played through both the left and R ch L ch
right speakers at the same volume. MIC 1 MIC 2 MIC 3
Note Connector
• When a Digital Boundary Microphone is set
to "Center stereo", make sure that it is
placed with its connector facing the display.
• When using Digital Boundary Microphones MIC 1: "Right side"
and an Analogue Boundary Microphone MIC 2: "Center Mono"
together, the output settings differ as MIC 3: "Left side"
follows:
– Digital Boundary Microphones: When setting Digital Boundary Microphones as
Manually set output follows:
– Analogue Boundary Microphone: Display Main video camera
Monaural output
• For the settings shown in the following Speaker Speaker
diagrams, the left/right channels are
displayed as viewed from the side of the
main video camera.
Here are examples of the relative position of Digital
Boundary Microphones. MIC 1 MIC 3
When setting Digital Boundary Microphones in
R ch L ch
a row perpendicular to the display:
Display Main video camera
Speaker Speaker Connector MIC 2
R ch L ch
MIC 1
R ch L ch
MIC 1: "Right side"
MIC 2: "Center Mono"
MIC 2 MIC 3: "Left side"
R ch L ch Note
MIC 3 • Make some noise near the Digital Boundary
Connector Microphone. " " is displayed to indicate
which Digital Boundary Microphone picks
up the noise.
• " " is not displayed when the Digital
MIC 1: "Center stereo" Boundary Microphone is mute.
MIC 2: "Center stereo"
• " " is not displayed when multiple Digital
MIC 3: "Center stereo"
Boundary Microphones pick up the sound at
the same time.

• When the Digital Boundary Microphone is an ID different from the one specified, no
mute, the sound made by pressing the MIC warning is displayed on the Home screen.
Mute button might make " " appear.
Note
• If multiple remote controls with assigned
5. Press [G].
IDs are being used close together, it is
• A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings recommended that you select "OFF" for
is displayed. "Check ID mismatch".

3. Press [G].
is displayed.
Note
• Do not move Digital Boundary Microphones 4. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER].
after completing settings. Otherwise the
settings will not match the location of the Digital 5. When "Remote ID enable" is set to "ON":
Boundary Microphone. The dialogue box for changing the ID of the remote
control is displayed. Proceed to step 6.
Note
Making Remote Control • While the dialogue box is displayed, video
Settings conference calls cannot be received.
You can specify a remote control ID from 1, 2, or 3 for When "Remote ID enable" is set to "OFF":
both the remote control and the unit. The unit responds The system settings screen is displayed. Press
to signals from any remote control with the same remote [Home] to return to the Home screen.
control ID as itself. If you do not specify an ID, the unit
responds to signals from all remote controls. You can 6. Use the following procedure to change the ID of the
confirm the remote control ID for the unit on the Home remote control.
screen (Page 41).
1. Press and hold [·] and [#] at the same time.
1. Select "Remote Ctrl ID" and press [ENTER].
2. Within 2 seconds after you release the buttons,
• The remote control settings screen is displayed. press the number (1 to 3) corresponding to the
ID that you specified for "Remote control ID"
2. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input: in step 1.
"Remote ID enable": Use [ ][ ] to select – 1: ID1
"ON" or "OFF" (default). – 2: ID2
• When "ON" is selected, you can set a specific – 3: ID3
remote control ID for the unit.
• When "OFF" is selected, the unit will respond 7. Press [ENTER].
to all remote controls. • The dialogue box disappears and the remote
"Remote control ID": Use [ ][ ] to select a control ID of the unit will be saved.
remote control ID ("ID1" [default]/"ID2"/"ID3") for
the unit. Note
"Check ID mismatch": Use [ ][ ] to select • If the dialogue box does not disappear,
"ON" (default) or "OFF". repeat the procedure above, several times
• When "ON" is selected, if the unit receives a if necessary. If the dialogue box still does
signal from a remote control that has an ID not disappear, turn the power off and then
different from the one specified on the Home back on to cancel the settings. For details,
screen, a warning is displayed. Follow the contact your dealer.
procedures on the screen to change the remote
control ID.
• When "OFF" is selected, even if the unit
receives a signal from a remote control that has

Changing Video Camera • If a camera is not connected or depending

on the model of the camera, the unit will
Settings receive commands from the remote control
even if "ON" is selected.
1. Select "Camera Settings" and press [ENTER].
"Layout change camera control": Use [ ][ ] to
• The video camera settings screen is displayed.
select whether the layout will change while the
camera is being controlled.
– "ON": The layout will change.
"CAM ctrl from remote site(s)": Use [ ][ ] to
– "OFF" (default): The layout will not change.
select whether to allow the other party to control
3. Press [G].
your video camera.
– "ON": Allows the other party to control your is displayed.
video camera.
– "OFF" (default): Prevents the other party from 4. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER].
controlling your video camera.
"Direct Cam Ctrl during call": Use [ ][ ] to
select whether camera operation by remote control
is enabled during a video conference call.
– "ON" (default): Allow camera operations using
the remote control. Making Language Settings
– "OFF": Do not allow camera operations using 1. Select "Language Setting" and press [ENTER].
the remote control.
• The language settings screen is displayed.
"Direct Cam Ctrl on Home Screen": Use [ ]
[ ] to select whether camera operation by remote 2. Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to select the
control is enabled when not in a video conference desired language.
call.
– "ON" (default): Allow camera operations using Note
the remote control. • The language you can select is as follows:
– "OFF": Do not allow camera operations using "English": English (default), "Deutsch":
the remote control. German, "Français": French, "Italiano":
"Pan Direction": Use [ ][ ] to select the Italian, "Español": Spanish,
direction in which the video camera will move when "Nederlands": Dutch, "Português":
the buttons on the remote control are pressed. Portuguese, " ": Japanese,
– "Normal" (default): The video camera will "Русскийязык": Russian, " ㅔԧЁ᭛ ":
move in the left/right direction, as viewed from Chinese " ": Arabic.
the video camera. • When Chinese is selected, "Arabic" is
– "Reversed": The video camera will move in the displayed to select Arabic.
left/right direction, as viewed from the subject.
"Remote control through function": Use [ ]
3. Press [ENTER].
[ ] to select whether the camera or the unit will
receive commands from the remote control. 4. Press [G].
– "ON": The camera will receive commands from • A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings
the remote control. is displayed.
– "OFF" (default): The unit will receive
commands from the remote control. 5. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER].
Note • The system settings screen is displayed in the
selected language.
• For software versions lower than 4.50,
"Remote control through function" is Note
displayed as "FIX Cam's Remote Ctrl
• If you accidentally choose the wrong
Rcvr".
language, follow the steps below to change
the language setting.

1. Press [Home]. – "ON" (default): Displays the icon.

2. Press [MENU]. – "OFF": Does not display the icon.
3. Press [ ] four times to select the fifth 3. Press [G].
item from the top, press [ENTER]. • The dialogue box to confirm saving the settings
4. Press [ ] twice. is displayed.
• The second page is displayed. Note
5. Press [ ] to select the second item
from the top, press [ENTER].
• If you proceed to step 2 in "To start and stop
recording" without performing step 3, you
• The language settings screen is
can start recording with the changed
displayed.
settings. The changed settings are not
6. Repeat the procedure from step 2. saved, and when you stop recording, the
settings return to the state before the
changes.
Making Recording Settings • The system settings screen is displayed.
You can set the USB recording settings during calls,
To start and stop recording
while idle, and during a multicast. You can also start and
stop recording while idle. 1. Select "USB Rec Settings" and press [ENTER].
• The recording settings screen is displayed.
Note 2. Use [ ][ ] to select "USB Rec" and press
• You can make settings only when "USB Rec" [ENTER].
in "Security Settings" is set to "ON". When not recording: The dialogue box to confirm
• The screen recorded in KX-VC2000 differs from whether to start recording is displayed. Use [ ]
KX-VC1000/KX-VC1300/KX-VC1600. For [ ] to select "Yes" or "No" and press [ENTER]
details about recording, refer to "Using USB – Selecting "Yes" starts recording.
Recording Features (Page 183)". – Selecting "No" does not start recording.
To change settings When recording: The dialogue box to confirm
whether to stop recording is displayed. Use [ ]
Note [ ] to select "Yes" or "No" and press [ENTER]
• You cannot change settings while recording. – Selecting "Yes" stops recording.
The unit records according to the settings – Selecting "No" does not stop recording.
displayed on the settings screen while
recording. Note
1. Select "USB Rec Settings" and press [ENTER]. • When you stop recording, do not remove
• The recording settings screen is displayed. the USB memory device until the recording
2. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input. complete dialogue box is displayed.
"Video Quality": Press [ENTER] and use [ ]
[ ] to select "High", "Medium" (default), or
"Low". Using Multicast
"Dual Display Rec screen": Press [ENTER] and
Refer to "Using Multicast (Page 172)".
use [ ][ ] to select "HDMI 1" (default) or "HDMI
2".
Note Setting the USB Device Mode

• You can make settings only when "Video You can switch to USB host mode and USB Device
Output" in "Video Output" is set to "HDMI Mode.
1 / HDMI 2" (Page 150). USB Host Mode: Connect a USB memory device to the
"Display Rec Status icon": Use [ ][ ] to select USB jack to import or export data, update software, or
whether to display the icon that indicates the unit is perform USB recording.
recording in the icon display area.

USB Device Mode: Connect a computer to the USB • The dialogue box to confirm saving the settings
jack to use this unit's camera and microphone with the is displayed. When you use [ ][ ] to select
computer. "Yes" and press [ENTER], the system settings
Note screen is displayed.
• You can make settings when "PC Peripheral" Note

is enabled in "Enhancement". • When you set "Display USB Device Mode
• When using USB Device Mode, make sure to
use the proprietary USB conversion cable. icon" to "ON", is displayed at the
• You cannot communicate with other sites in A position during USB Device Mode.
USB Device Mode (while "USB Device
Mode" is set to "ON" in step 2).
• For details about USB Device Mode, refer to
"Using USB Device Mode (Page 186)".
1. Select "USB Device Mode" and press [ENTER].
• The USB Device Mode settings screen is
displayed.
2. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input. A
"USB Device Mode": Use [ ][ ] to select
"ON" or "OFF" (default).
"Video Quality": Press [ENTER] and use [ ]
[ ] to select "640x480 (Max. 30 fps)" (default) or
"1280x720 (Max. 15 fps)".
Display Unit Information
You can view the setting information for the unit.
Note
• If the unit's frequency is 50 Hz (Page 24), 1. Select "System Info." and press [ENTER].
"640x480 (Max. 30 fps)" becomes • The unit information screen is displayed
"640x480 (Max. 25 fps)" and "1280x720 (Page 104).
(Max. 15 fps)" becomes "1280x720 (Max.
12.5 fps)".
"Display USB Device Mode icon": Use [ ][ ]
to select whether to display the icon that indicates
the unit is in USB Device Mode in the icon display
area.
– "ON" (default): Displays the icon.
– "OFF": Does not display the icon.
3. Press [G].
If "USB Device Mode" was changed from "OFF"
to "ON"
• The dialogue box to confirm saving the settings
and switching the mode is displayed. When you
use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press
[ENTER], the USB Device Mode switches and
the Home screen is displayed. 2. Press [BACK].
Note • The system setting screen is displayed.
• To display the computer screen on a TV
connected to the unit, press [PC].
• The audio input during USB Device Mode is Checking Enhanced Features
the same as when "HDMI Audio input / You can check which features have been activated due
content" (Page 152) is set to "PC". to software enhancement (Page 158).
For all other cases

1. Select "Enhancement" and press [ENTER]. 3. Press [R].

• The enhanced feature confirmation screen is • The network test starts. After the network test is
displayed. finished, if the network test was successful or
timed out, the details of the results are
displayed. If the network test failed, a message
indicating the failure is displayed.
4. Press [BACK].
• The system setting screen is displayed.
Performing Self Diagnosis

You can check how your image will be displayed and
how your voice will be heard to the other party before
starting a video conference call, using your own display
and speakers.
Note
Note • Self diagnosis can be performed even when a
headset is connected.
• For details about "Activated Features",
refer to Page 158. 1. Select "Self Diag." and press [ENTER].
• The self diagnosis screen is displayed with the
dialogue box.
2. Press [BACK].
• The system setting screen is displayed. Note
• You can hide or display the dialogue box by
pressing [B].
Performing a Network Test • Set the microphone at least 1 m (3.3 ft)
away from the speakers.
You can confirm whether a network connection can be
established with a particular IP address.
2. Press [R].
Note • The self diagnosis starts.
• You cannot perform a network test from the
contact list screen or the call history screen. Note
1. Select "Network Test" and press [ENTER]. • Check the image that is displayed from the
main video camera.
• The network test screen is displayed.
• To avoid feedback, slowly raise the volume
using the remote control’s [+] button.
2. Enter an IP address.
• When someone speaks into the
Note microphone, confirm whether the sound
plays back through the speakers.
• If an IPv4 address contains 1 or 2 digit
numbers, enter these numbers as they are. • During self diagnosis, all Boundary
Do not enter like [.001]. Microphones will be set to "Center
Example: The IP address is [192.168.0.1]. stereo".
– Correct entry: [192.168.0.1] • During self diagnosis, the tone will be set to
"Standard".
– Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001]
• For the input format when an IPv6 address
is used, refer to Page 47. 3. Press [R].
• Host names cannot be entered. • The self diagnosis ends.

Note 2. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER].

• If you do not press [R], the self diagnosis • The remote maintenance screen is displayed.
will automatically end after about
10 minutes.
4. Press [BACK].
Displaying the Licence

Information
You can display information about the licence and Open
Source Software.
1. Select "License Info." and press [ENTER].
• The licence information display screen is
displayed.
• Press [R] to move to the next page, and press
[B] to move to the previous page.
2. Press [BACK].
Displaying the End-User

Licence Agreement
You can display information about the End-User
Licence Agreement.
1. Select "EULA" and press [ENTER].
• The End-User Licence Agreement display
screen is displayed.
2. Press [BACK].
Performing Remote
Maintenance
The following operation is for performing remote
maintenance by your dealer. After performing the
operation, you cannot use the unit until remote
maintenance is finished. However, turning the power off
and then back on cancels remote maintenance, and you
can use the unit. For details, contact your dealer.
1. Select "Remote access" and press [ENTER].
• The dialogue box confirming whether you want
to start remote maintenance is displayed.

Making Administrator Menu Settings
Administrator Menu List

You can set, change, and confirm the unit’s administrator functions.
Note
• If a video conference call is received while data is being entered, a dialogue box to confirm if you answer
a video conference call is displayed.
• When "Yes" is selected, you can answer a video conference call while any unsaved data is lost.
• When "No" is selected, you can continue entering the data.
1. Press [MENU].
2. Use [ ][ ] to select "Settings" and press [ENTER].

3. Press [ ][ ] to display the fourth page.
4. Use [ ][ ] to select "Admin login" and press [ENTER].

• The login screen is displayed.
5. Use [ ][ ] to select "Password", then enter the administrator password (4–10 digits).
• The administrator menu screen is displayed.

Note
• You can display the login screen by pressing [Y] in the Menu screen instead of performing steps
1–4.
• Please enter the administrator password that was set during installation.
• If you forget the administrator password, please contact your dealer.
6. Use [ ][ ] to select "Login" and press [ENTER].

• The Administrator menu list is displayed.
Administrator Menu Screen List
A Password Settings:
Sets the unit’s administrator password
(Page 140).
B Encryption:
Sets the use of encrypted
communications and users, etc.
(Page 140).
C Update Settings:
Performs the settings for confirming the
latest version before performing a
software update (Page 141).
D Connection mode:
Sets the mode for communicating with
the other party (Page 142).
E NAT Settings:
Sets NAT information (Page 142).
[ ] [ ]
Previous Following
page page
[B] [R]
F Call Type Settings:
Sets the communication types used by
the unit (Page 143).
G SIP Settings:
Sets SIP settings (Page 144).
H H.323 Settings:
Sets H.323 settings (Page 145).
I Codec Settings:
Sets the enabling/disabling of codecs
(Page 147).
J Security Settings:
Sets settings such as call denied and call
history (page 147).

[ ] [ ]
Previous Following
page page
[B] [R]
K Video Output:
Sets HDMI and analogue component
video output (Page 150).
L Audio I/O:
Sets audio settings (Page 152).
M GUI Settings:
Sets which items are displayed on the
menu screens and other screens
(Page 153).
N HDMI Settings:
Sets the enabling/disabling of control via
HDMI (Page 154).
O Power Settings:
Sets automatic power on and off
(Page 154).
[ ] [ ]
Previous Following
page page
[B] [R]
P Shortcut Settings:
Sets the shortcut function where the
remote control’s colour keys can be set
to display screens such as the network
settings screen (Page 155).
Q Select local site set:
Sets local site settings (Page 156).
R Multicast Tree Set.:
Sets the multicast function settings
(Page 175).
S Export data:
Exports information from the contact list,
etc. (Page 156).
T Import data:
Imports exported data from a USB
memory device (Page 157).
[ ] [ ]
Previous Following
page page
[B] [R]

U Enhancement:
Activates registration keys used for
enhancing the features of the device
(Page 158).
V Software update:
Updates the software from a USB
memory device (Page 159).
W Camera Initialize:
Initialises your own site’s video camera
(Page 160).
X System Initialize:
Initialises all settings apart from those for
functions enabled from enhanced
software (Page 160).
Y Remote access Set.:
Sets the settings required to remotely
access the unit (Page 161).
7. Use [ ][ ] to select the items for input and press [ENTER].

• The selected screen is displayed. Perform settings following the descriptions of each screen (A
through Y).
8. Press [Home].

Making Administrator • If an encryption key is not set for SIP

communication, you cannot enable encryption.
Password Settings • When using encrypted communication with the
KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service, set SIP
1. Select "Password Settings" and press [ENTER]. communication encryption using this setting.
• The password settings screen is displayed. When using IP/NAT traversal mode, use the
same encryption settings as for SIP
2. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items and enter communication in IP mode or NAT traversal
a password (4–10 digits): mode.
"Current password": Enter the current password • Be aware that if encryption is disabled,
(default: 00000000). eavesdropping might be possible on networks
"New password": Enter the new password. that are not secured against such actions.
"Retype new password": Enter the new password 1. Select "Encryption" and press [ENTER].
again.
• The encryption settings screen is displayed.
Note
• Please change the default login password
the first time the unit is installed. Note
• Be sure to keep the password safe.
• When using IP mode:
– When "SIP" is set to "OFF" on the call
3. Press [G]. type settings screen (Page 143),
• A dialogue box to confirm the changing of "Access mode (SIP)", "Encryption
settings is displayed. (SIP)" and "Encryption Key (SIP)"
cannot be set.
4. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER]. – When "H.323" is set to "OFF" on the
• The administrator menu screen is displayed. call type settings screen (Page 143),
"Access mode (H.323)" and
"Encryption (H.323)" cannot be set.
– "Access mode (NAT Traversal)" and
Making Encryption Settings "Encryption (NAT Traversal)" cannot
be set.
Note • When using NAT Traversal mode:
• For 2-party video conference calls, a – "Access mode (SIP)", "Encryption
connection cannot be made if the two party’s (SIP)", "Access mode (H.323)", and
settings for communication encryption do not "Encryption (H.323)" cannot be set.
match. However, when communication is • When using IP/NAT Traversal mode:
performed using H.323, and either site has – When "H.323" is set to "OFF" on the
"Best effort" set for "Encryption (H.323)", a call type settings screen (Page 143),
connection can be made even if the sites’ "Access mode (H.323)" and
communication encryption settings are not the "Encryption (H.323)" cannot be set.
same. For multiple-party video conference "Access mode (SIP)"/"Access mode (NAT
calls, the ability for the Main Site to connect to Traversal)"/"Access mode (H.323)": Use [ ]
Sub Sites is determined the same way as for [ ] to select "Admin" (default) or "User".
2-party video conference calls.
• When "Admin" is selected, only the network
• Be careful when changing encryption settings
administrator can enable/disable encryption.
because doing so may cause you to become
• When "User" is selected, any users can
unable to communicate with other parties.
enable/disable encryption (Page 123,
• There is a danger that encryption settings will
Page 123, Page 123).
be changed by a third party. Therefore, be
"Encryption (SIP)"/"Encryption (NAT
careful when managing the administrator
Traversal)": Use [ ][ ] to select whether to
password and giving users the authority to
change encryption settings. enable encryption.
– "ON": Encryption is enabled.

– "OFF" (default): Encryption is disabled. Making Software Update

"Encryption Key (SIP)": Enter an encryption key
(4 to 256 characters [alphanumeric, space, Settings
symbols]) (Page 190).
Preparation settings for updating the software can be
Note made here.
• &, <, >, comma (,), double quotation mark Note
(") cannot be entered.
• While being entered, the characters of the • The DNS server setting is necessary to check
encryption key are displayed, but once the for upgrades and to download the latest
settings are saved, all the characters will be software from the network (Page 118).
displayed as asterisks (*), and you will no
longer be able to check the encryption key 1. Select "Update Settings" and press [ENTER].
on the screen. Record the encryption key • The update settings screen is displayed.
beforehand, and store it in a safe location.
• If the value specified in "Encryption Key 2. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input:
(SIP)" does not match the other party’s, the "Proxy Server Address": Enter the IP address of
video conference call will not start even if the proxy server.
encryption is enabled.
• When the encryption key is displayed as Note
asterisks (*), pressing [Y] deletes the entire • IPv6 addresses and host names cannot be
encryption key. used for setting.
• The name of "Encryption Key (SIP)" • If the IP address contains 1 or 2 digit
changes depending on the connection numbers, enter these numbers as they are.
mode. Do not enter like [.001].
– When IP mode is used: "Encryption Example: The IP address is [192.168.0.1].
Key (SIP)" – Correct entry: [192.168.0.1]
– When using NAT Traversal mode: – Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001]
"Encryption Key (NAT Traversal)" "Proxy Server Port": Enter the proxy server port
– When using IP/NAT Traversal mode: number (1–65535).
"Encryption Key (SIP / NAT Trav.)" "Automatic Version Check": Use [ ][ ] to
"Encryption (H.323)": Press [ENTER] and use select "ON" or "OFF" (default).
[ ][ ] to select whether to enable encryption. • When "ON" is selected, the unit will
– "Best effort": enables encrypted automatically look up the DNS server or proxy
communication when the other party has server to see if there are updates for your
enabled encrypted communication. When software on start-up. If updates are available, a
disabled, communication is performed without dialogue box is displayed on the Home screen.
encryption. • When "OFF" is selected, the unit will not
– "ON": Encryption is enabled. automatically look up the DNS server or proxy
– "OFF" (default): Encryption is disabled. server to see if there are updates for your
software on start-up.
Note
• This setting is available only when 3. Press [G].
"Admin" is selected for "Access mode • A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings
(SIP)"/"Access mode (H.323)". is displayed.
3. Press [G]. 4. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER].

• A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings • The administrator menu screen is displayed.
is displayed.


Making Connection Mode • When using IP mode (Page 142), "NAT" is not
displayed in step 2.
Settings • When using NAT traversal mode (Page 142),
"Static NAT", "WAN IP Address", and "Local
1. Select "Connection mode" and press [ENTER]. address judgement" are not displayed in step
• The connection mode setting screen is 2.
displayed. • This setting is available only when "IP Address
(LAN 1)" (setting) is set to "Manual" in
2. Press [ENTER], use [ ][ ] to select the desired "Network Settings" (Page 118).
connection mode, and then press [ENTER] again. • Depending on the model you are using, the
"IP Mode": Communication is established over the available settings for "RTP and RTCP for
Internet or an intranet. Audio", "RTP and RTCP for Video", "Camera
"NAT Traversal Mode": Communication is Control", "RTP and RTCP for Video (Sub)",
established using KX-VC Series NAT Traversal "BFCP", and "H.245" differ. The available
Service. settings are written in the order of KX-VC2000,
"IP / NAT Traversal Mode": Performs KX-VC1600, and then KX-VC1300/
communication using the 2 modes of IP Mode and KX-VC1000.
NAT Traversal Mode.
1. Select "NAT Settings" and press [ENTER].
Note • The NAT settings screen is displayed.
• Communication cannot be established with
a party whose connection mode setting 2. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input:
differs from yours. • The following items are displayed over 2 pages.
• "NAT Traversal Mode" can be used only To view all the items, press [R] to move to the
after activating KX-VC Series NAT next page, and press [B] to move to the
Traversal Service with an activation key. previous page.
For details about KX-VC Series NAT • If the settings have been changed, press [G]
Traversal Service, refer to the following web before changing to a different screen to save
site: the settings.
https://panasonic.net/cns/psn/ "NAT": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to select
products/hdvc/nat/nat_traversal/index.html "Dynamic" (default) or "Static".
3. Press [G]. "Static NAT": Use [ ][ ] to select "ON" or
• A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings "OFF" (default).
and system restart after saving is displayed.
Note
4. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER]. • To select "ON", "H.460" must be set to
"OFF" on the H.323 settings screen
(Page 145).
changes to system settings.
• When "ON" is selected, the IP address of
Note the WAN side will be displayed for the unit
information on the Home screen (Page 41).
• When changing the connection mode, the time
required for a restart may depend on network "WAN IP Address": Enter the WAN IP address of
conditions. the router.
Note
• IPv6 addresses cannot be used for setting.
Making NAT Settings • If the IP address contains 1 or 2 digit
Note numbers, enter these numbers as they are.
Do not enter like [.001].
• To change the static NAT settings, it is Example: The IP address is [192.168.0.1].
necessary to configure system settings, – Correct entry: [192.168.0.1]
including the port number settings. For details,
– Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001]

• If "Obtain automatically" is displayed, the – "RTP and RTCP for Video (Sub)"
WAN IP address cannot be set. For details, – "BFCP"
contact your dealer. – "H.245"
"Local address judgement": Press [ENTER] and 3. Press [G].
use [ ][ ] to select "OFF" (default) or "Auto". • A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings
– "OFF" (default): Static NAT is applied to all is displayed.
addresses.
– "Auto": Static NAT is not applied to private 4. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER].
addresses. • The administrator menu screen is displayed.
"Conversion IP and Port Num.": Use [ ][ ] to
select "ON" or "OFF" (default).
Note
• When using a router that features
Making Call Type Settings
Symmetric NAT to connect to a mobile 1. Select "Call Type Settings" and press [ENTER].
device, select "ON". • The call type settings screen is displayed.
• When "ON" is selected, configure static
NAT settings for the unit and the router that 2. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input:
the unit is connected to.
"SIP": Use [ ][ ] to select "ON" (default) or
"RTP and RTCP for Audio": Enter the initial port "OFF".
number (5100–5108/5100–5164/5100–5188) for
RTP and RTCP for Audio (default: 5100). Note
"RTP and RTCP for Video": Enter the initial port • When "OFF" is selected, you cannot use a
number (5200–5208/5200–5264/5200–5288) for SIP server even if "ON" is set to "SIP
RTP and RTCP for Video (default: 5200). Server" (Page 144).
"Camera Control": Enter the initial port number • If the other party is using the KX-VC300/
(5300–5308/5300–5364/5300–5388) for controlling KX-VC600 with a software version older
a video camera (default: 5300). than 3.00 (not including 3.00), you cannot
"RTP and RTCP for Video (Sub)": Input the sub make a video conference call using H.323.
image RTP/RTCP port number (5400–5408/5400– You must select "ON".
5464/5400–5488). (default: 5400)
"BFCP": Input the BFCP initial port number (5800– "H.323": Use [ ][ ] to select "ON" (default) or
5876/5800–5890/5800–5895). (default: 5800) "OFF".
"SIP": Enter the port number for 2-party video
Note
conference calls (5000–5099) for communication
using a SIP server (default: 5060). • When "OFF" is selected, you cannot use a
gatekeeper and H.460 even if "ON" is
Note selected for "Gatekeeper" and "H.
• The changed port number will be displayed 460" (Page 145).
on the unit information screen (Page 104). "Priority for connection mode": Press [ENTER]
"H.245": Enter the initial port number for H.245 and use [ ][ ] to select "IP Mode
(5500–5550/5500–5580/5500–5590) (default: (SIP)" (default), "IP Mode (H.323)", or "NAT
5500). Traversal Mode".
Note Note
• For the following items, a number will be • The communication type selected here will
automatically added to the initial port be reflected onto the device’s settings such
number that you enter. The total number as its displayed contents and default
indicates the range and values of available connection mode values for making calls.
port numbers for the items. 3. Press [G].
– "RTP and RTCP for Audio" • A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings
– "RTP and RTCP for Video" is displayed.
– "Camera Control"

4. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER]. – Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001]

• The administrator menu screen is displayed. • For the input format when an IPv6 address
is used, refer to Page 47.
• The DNS server setting is necessary to
enter host names (Page 118).
Making SIP Settings • See Page 47 for details about the
characters that can be input for host names.
When using a SIP server over an intranet, video "SIP Username": Enter the SIP user name.
conference calls can be made using SIP URIs (SIP user "SIP Domain Name": Enter the SIP domain name.
name@SIP domain name).
Note
Note
• These settings can only be made when "SIP" characters that can be input.
is set to "ON" on the call type settings screen. • Enter a standards-compliant value. For
• Video conference calls to an MCU or a details, contact your network administrator.
non-Panasonic video conference system
"Digest Authentication": Use [ ][ ] to select
through a SIP server using a SIP URI are not
guaranteed. whether to enable digest authentication.
• When connecting to an MCU by entering the – "ON": Enables digest authentication.
MCU’s conference room number@IP address, – "OFF" (default): Disables digest authentication.
"SIP Server" and "Gatekeeper" (Page 145) "Authentication ID": Enter an authentication ID
must be set to "OFF". (1–60 characters [alphanumeric, space, symbols])
• If video conference calls cannot be made (Page 190). &, <, >, comma (,), double quotation
because there is a problem with the SIP server, mark (") cannot be entered.
the SIP settings are incorrect (on the server, or "Authentication Password": Enter an
on the unit), etc., "Not registered" will be authentication password (0–60 characters
displayed on the Home screen instead of the [alphanumeric, space, symbols]) (Page 190). &, <,
SIP user name. In this case, you cannot make >, comma (,), double quotation mark (") cannot be
calls using either IP addresses or SIP. Contact entered.
your network administrator. Note
1. Select "SIP Settings" and press [ENTER]. • To communicate using a SIP server, it may
• The SIP setting screen is displayed. be necessary to set "Digest
Authentication", "Authentication ID",
2. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input: and "Authentication Password". For
"SIP Server": Use [ ][ ] to select "ON" or details, contact your network administrator.
"OFF" (default). • "Authentication ID" and "Authentication
Password" can only be set when "Digest
Note Authentication" is set to "ON".
• To communicate using a SIP server, "ON" • While being entered, the characters of the
must be selected and "SIP Server authentication password are displayed, but
Address", "SIP Username", and "SIP once the settings are saved, all the
Domain Name" must be set. characters will be displayed as asterisks (*),
• To select "ON", "Gatekeeper" (Page 145) and you will no longer be able to check the
must be set to "OFF". authentication password on the screen.
"SIP Server Address": Enter the SIP server’s IP Record the authentication password
address (or host name). beforehand, and store it in a safe location.
• When the authentication password is
Note displayed as asterisks (*), pressing [Y]
• If an IPv4 address contains 1 or 2 digit deletes the entire authentication password.
numbers, enter these numbers as they are. "SIP Transport Protocol": Press [ENTER] and
Do not enter like [.001]. then use [ ][ ] to select between protocols
Example: The IP address is [192.168.0.1]. (UDP, TCP, Auto (Switch by Site), or Auto (TCP /
– Correct entry: [192.168.0.1] UDP) [default]) used when communicating via SIP.

Note Note
• When Auto (Switch by Site) is selected, • If an IPv4 address contains 1 or 2 digit
TCP will be used if using a SIP server, and numbers, enter these numbers as they are.
UDP will be used if not using a SIP server. Do not enter like [.001].
When Auto (TCP / UDP) is selected, Example: The IP address is [192.168.0.1].
communication will be attempted in order of – Correct entry: [192.168.0.1]
TCP and then UDP. Normally, select Auto – Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001]
(TCP / UDP). • For the input format when an IPv6 address
is used, refer to Page 47.
3. Press [G]. • The DNS server setting is necessary to
• A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings enter host names (Page 118).
is displayed. • See Page 47 for details about the
characters that can be input for host names.
4. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER]. "H.323 Name": Enter the H.323 name.
• The administrator menu screen is displayed. "H.323 Extension": Enter the H.323 extension.
Note
Making H.323 Settings characters that can be input.
• Enter a standards-compliant value. For
Note details, contact your network administrator.
• These settings can only be made when "H. "Authentication": Use [ ][ ] to select whether
323" is set to "ON" on the call type settings to enable authentication.
screen. – "ON": Enables authentication.
• When connecting to an MCU by entering the – "OFF" (default): Disables authentication.
MCU’s conference room number@IP address, "Authentication ID": Enter an authentication ID
"SIP Server" (Page 144) and "Gatekeeper" (1–60 characters [alphanumeric, space, symbols])
must be set to "OFF". (Page 190). &, <, >, comma (,), double quotation
• If video conference calls cannot be made mark (") cannot be entered.
because there is a problem with the gatekeeper "Authentication Password": Enter an
and H.460 server, the H.323 settings are authentication password (0–60 characters
incorrect (on the gatekeeper and the H.460 [alphanumeric, space, symbols]) (Page 190). &, <,
server, or on the unit), etc., "Not registered" >, comma (,), double quotation mark (") cannot be
will be displayed on the Home screen instead of entered.
the H.323 extension/H.323 name. In this case,
you cannot make calls using either IP Note
addresses or the gatekeeper and H.460 server. • "Authentication ID" and "Authentication
Contact your network administrator. Password" can only be set when
1. Select "H.323 Settings" and press [ENTER]. "Authentication" is set to "ON".
• The H.323 settings screen is displayed. • While being entered, the characters of the
authentication password are displayed, but
once the settings are saved, all the
characters will be displayed as asterisks (*),
"Gatekeeper": Use [ ][ ] to select "ON" or and you will no longer be able to check the
"OFF" (default). authentication password on the screen.
Note Record the authentication password
beforehand, and store it in a safe location.
• This setting is available only when "ON" is • When the authentication password is
selected for "H.323" (Page 143) and displayed as asterisks (*), pressing [Y]
"OFF" is selected for "SIP Server". deletes the entire authentication password.
"Gatekeeper Address": Enter the gatekeeper’s IP
"H.460": Use [ ][ ] to select "ON" or
address (or host name).
"OFF" (default).

3. Press [G].
is displayed.


Making Codec Settings

These settings determine which codecs are enabled and disabled.
Note
• Changing codec settings may affect the ability to make and receive calls. For details, contact your
dealer.
• If "NAT Traversal Mode" is selected in the connection mode settings, codec settings will not be
displayed.
1. Select "Codec Settings" and press [ENTER].
• The codec settings screen is displayed.
2. Select the following items for input.

• The following items are displayed over 2 pages. Press [B] to move to the H.323 setting screen. To
return to the SIP setting screen, press [B] again.
"SIP / Video System"/"SIP / Audio System"/"H.323 / Video System"/"H.323 / Audio System": Use
[ ][ ] to select the item that you want to change and press [ENTER].
• Checkmarks are added or removed. Codecs without a checkmark are disabled.
• By default, all are enabled.
Note
• The setting of "H.264 / Baseline Profile (PktMode0)" codec for "H.323 / Video System" and the
setting of "G.722" codec for "H.323 / Audio System" cannot be changed.
• The setting of "H.264 / Baseline Profile (PktMode0)" codec for "SIP / Video System" and the
setting of "G.722" codec for "SIP / Audio System" cannot be changed.
"SIP / QoS"/"H.323 / QoS": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to select whether to enable QoS.
– "ON" (default): QoS will be enabled.
– "OFF": QoS will be disabled.
3. Press [G].
• A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings is displayed.

Making Security Settings

Settings such as call denied, call history, and USB recording can be made here.
1. Select "Security Settings" and press [ENTER].
• The security settings screen is displayed.
2. Select the following items for input using [ ][ ].
Note
• The items are displayed across 2 screens. You can display all items by pressing [R] to move to
the next screen and pressing [B] to move to the previous screen. If you changed the settings, press
[G] before moving screens to save the settings.
"Incoming Call from a non-regist.": Use [ ][ ] to select whether to allow incoming calls from units not
registered in the contact list.
– "ON" (default): Allows incoming calls.

– "OFF": Rejects incoming calls.

Note
• When "Incoming Call from a non-regist." is set to "ON", "HDVC Incoming Call", "HDVC Mobile
Incoming Call", and "Save denied call to History" are not available.
"HDVC Incoming Call": When "Incoming Call from a non-regist." is set to "OFF", use [ ][ ] to select
whether to allow incoming calls from HD Visual Communication Unit/HDVC-MPCS.
– "ON": Allows incoming calls.
– "OFF" (default): Rejects incoming calls.
"HDVC Mobile Incoming Call": When "Incoming Call from a non-regist." is set to "OFF", use [ ]
[ ] to select whether to allow incoming calls from HDVC Mobile (Page 171).
– "ON": Allows incoming calls.
– "OFF" (default): Rejects incoming calls.
"Incoming Call Authentication": Use [ ][ ] to select whether to authenticate incoming calls with an
authentication number.
• "ON": Performs authentication.
• "OFF" (default): Does not perform authentication.
Note
• When "Incoming Call Authentication" is set to "OFF", you cannot set "Authentication
Number", "HDVC Authentication", and "HDVC Mobile Authentication".
• You cannot use authentication features for incoming calls from communication through a SIP server
or H.323 gatekeeper.
• When "Incoming Call from a non-regist." is set to "OFF" and "Incoming Call
Authentication" is set to "ON", you will receive incoming calls if either one of the conditions for
allowing incoming calls is met.
"Authentication Number": If "Incoming Call Authentication" is set to "ON", set a 6 to 20 digit number.
Note
• A terminal making a call must input the same number as "Authentication Number" with the
conference room number.
Outgoing call number example) When the authentication number is "123456"
(Correct) [email protected]
(Wrong) [email protected]
If the terminal making a call is another company’s terminal, a different string may be used instead
of "@" (example: 123456##192.168.0.1).
The authentication number is recognized as "123456" even in this case.
"HDVC Authentication": If "Incoming Call Authentication" is set to "ON", use [ ][ ] to select
whether to authenticate incoming calls from HD Visual Communication Units/HDVC-MPCS.
• "ON" (default): Performs authentication.
• "OFF": Allows incoming calls without authentication.
"HDVC Mobile Authentication": If "Incoming Call Authentication" is set to "ON", use [ ][ ] to select
whether to authenticate incoming calls from HDVC Mobile.
• "ON" (default): Performs authentication.
• "OFF": Allows incoming calls without authentication.
"Save denied call to History": When "Incoming Call from a non-regist." is set to "OFF" or "Incoming
Call Authentication" is set to "ON", use [ ][ ] to select whether to save rejected calls to the call history.
– "ON" (default): Saves calls.
– "OFF": Does not save calls.

Note
• If "Incoming Call from a non-regist." is set to "ON" and "Incoming Call Authentication" is
set to "OFF", you cannot set "Save denied call to History".
"How to Save Call History": Press [ENTER], and select the how to save calls to the call history using
[ ][ ].
– "Latest Call History": Only the latest call to the same party is saved.
– "Entire Call History" (default): All calls are saved to the call history.
"Delete Call History": Use [ ][ ] to select whether to enable deletion of the call history entries in the
call history screen.
– "ON" (default): Enables deletion.
– "OFF": Disables deletion.
"USB Rec": Use [ ][ ] to select enabling or disabling USB recording features.
– "ON": Enables recording features.
– "OFF" (default): Disables recording features.
3. Press [G].
• The dialogue box to confirm saving the settings is displayed.

Making Video Output Settings – "Content / Camera (SideBySide)": Displays

your own site’s shared contents with camera
Sets video output to HDMI. image of the other party’s site arranged
1. Select "Video Output" and press [ENTER]. side-by-side.
• The video output settings screen is displayed. – "Other Site": Displays camera image of the
other party’s site.
2. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input: – "Local Site": Displays camera image of your
"Video Output": Press [ENTER] and use [ ] own site.
"Layout 2 (Switching video)": Press [ENTER]
[ ] to select whether to use HDMI2.
and use [ ][ ] to select the display method when
– "HDMI 1" (default): Only HDMI1 is used.
contents are shared during dual stream
– "HDMI 1 / HDMI 2": HDMI1 and HDMI2 are communication.
used for the display of 2 screens.
– "Content" (default): Displays your own shared
Note contents.
• When "HDMI 1 / HDMI 2" is selected for the
– "Content / Other (PwithP)": Displays your own
site’s shared contents with camera image of the
KX-VC1300 or KX-VC1600, or a
other party’s site as a picture-in-picture.
KX-VC1000 that has been expanded for
HDMI Dual Monitor, PinP is not available. – "Content / Local (PwithP)": Displays your own
site’s shared contents and camera image as a
• When using a KX-VC1000 that has not
picture-in-picture.
been expanded for HDMI Dual Monitor
support, "Video Output" is not displayed. – "Content / Other (SideBySide)": Displays
In this case, the available selections for your own site’s shared contents with camera
"Default Screen Layout", "Layout 1 image of the other party’s site arranged
(Switching video)", and "Layout 2 side-by-side.
(Switching video)" are the same as when – "Content / Local (SideBySide)": Displays
"HDMI 1" is selected for "Video Output". your own site’s shared contents and camera
image arranged side-by-side.
– "Other Site": Displays camera image of the
When selecting "HDMI 1":
other party’s site.
"Default Screen Layout": Press [ENTER] and use
– "Local Site": Displays the image of your own
[ ][ ] to select the layout during video
site.
conference calls when contents are not being
shared.
When selecting "HDMI 1 / HDMI 2":
– "Other Site" (default): Displays the image of "Default Screen Layout": Press [ENTER] and use
the other party’s site.
[ ][ ] to select the layout during video
– "Other / Local (PwithP)": Displays the image
conference calls when contents are not being
of the other party’s site with your own site’s
shared.
image as a picture-in-picture.
– "Other / Local" (default): Displays the image of
– "Other / Local (SideBySide)": Displays the
the other party using HDMI1, and your own
image of the other party’s site with your own
site’s image using HDMI2.
site’s image arranged side-by-side.
– "Local / Other": Displays your own site’s image
– "Local Site": Displays the image of your own
using HDMI1, and the image of the other party
site.
image using HDMI2.
– "Other / Other": Displays the image of the other
party image using HDMI1 and HDMI2.
contents are shared during single stream "Layout 1 (Switching video)": Press [ENTER]
communication.
– "Content" (default): Displays your own site’s
contents are shared during single stream
shared contents.
communication.
– "Content / Camera (PwithP)": Displays your
– "Content / Other" (default): Displays your own
own site’s shared contents with camera image
shared contents using HDMI1, and the image of
of the other party’s site as a picture-in-picture.
the other party using HDMI2.

– "Other / Content": Displays the image of the – "Same as HDMI 2": Outputs an analogue
other party using HDMI1, and your own site’s component signal that is the same image as for
shared contents using HDMI2. HDMI2.
– "Content / Content": Displays the image of "Max. Resolution" (KX-VC1600/KX-VC2000):
your own site’s shared contents using HDMI1 Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to select
and HDMI2. "1080i" (default) or "1080p".
and use [ ][ ] to select the display method when Note
contents are shared during dual stream • The set maximum resolution that will be
communication. applied will be for analogue component
– "Content / Other" (default): Displays your own output and an HDMI output equivalent to
shared contents using HDMI1, and the image of analogue component.
the other party using HDMI2. "Display position of local site": Press [ENTER]
– "Other / Content": Displays the image of the and use [ ][ ] to select the picture-in-picture
other party using HDMI1, and your own site’s (PinP) display position of your site’s image.
shared contents using HDMI2. – "Upper right" (default): Your image is
– "Content / Content": Displays the image of displayed at the upper-right part of the screen.
your own site’s shared contents using HDMI1 – "Lower right": Your image is displayed at the
and HDMI2. lower-right part of the screen.
– "Upper left": Your image is displayed at the
"Output of HDMI 3" (KX-VC1600/KX-VC2000): upper-left part of the screen.
Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to select the – "Lower left": Your image is displayed at the
output to HDMI3. lower-left part of the screen.
– "Local site video" (default): Outputs your own
site’s image to HDMI3. Note
– "Rec (HDMI 1 / LR-Split)": Split the signals of • For the KX-VC1300 or KX-VC1600, or a
HDMI1 for video and audio recording, KX-VC1000 that has been expanded for
outputting L (other sites’ audio) and R (your own HDMI Dual Monitor, when "HDMI 1 / HDMI
site’s audio) to HDMI3. 2" is selected in "Video Output", PinP is
– "Rec (HDMI 1 / LR-Mix)": Combine the signals not available.
of HDMI1 for video and audio recording, • By pressing [R] during video conference
outputting L (other sites’ audio) and R (your own calls, you can move your own image
site’s audio) to HDMI3. clockwise from the preset position ("PinP"
– "Rec (HDMI 2 / LR-Split)": Split the signal of is displayed for the [R] guideline). You can
HDMI2 for video and audio recording, stop displaying your own image by pressing
outputting L (other sites’ audio) and R (your own [BACK].
site’s audio) to HDMI3.
– "Rec (HDMI 2 / LR-Mix)": Combine the signals 3. Press [G].
of HDMI2 for video and audio recording, • A dialogue box to confirm the changing of
outputting L (other sites’ audio) and R (your own settings is displayed.
site’s audio) to HDMI3.
Note 4. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER].

• When your own site’s image is selected, • The administrator menu screen is displayed.
use the video camera at a resolution of
1080p/1080i. 720p cannot be used.
"Analog compo. video output" (KX-VC1600/
KX-VC2000): Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to
select settings for analogue component output.
– "Same as HDMI 1" (default): Outputs an
analogue component signal that is the same
image as for HDMI1.

Making Audio Input/Output – "HDMI 1" (default): Outputs audio from HDMI1.
– "HDMI 2": Outputs audio from HDMI2.
Settings – "OFF": Audio is not output to HDMI.
Note Note
• These settings are for adjusting the audio • When using a KX-VC1000 that has not
handling. been expanded for HDMI Dual Monitor
• "Echo Canceller" and "Auto Gain Control" support, "HDMI 2" is not displayed.
should normally be set to "ON". Changing • In the image output settings, when "Video
either of these settings to "OFF" may result in Output" is set to "HDMI 1", "HDMI 2" is not
degradation of the sound quality during a video displayed (Page 150).
conference call. "Output local site sound": Press [ENTER] and
• "Output local site sound" should normally be use [ ][ ] to select whether your own site’s audio
set to "OFF". is output to its destination during a video conference
• When a mic is connected, feedback may occur call.
if your voice is output through the TV speakers. – "OFF" (default): Local site audio is not output.
In places where a mic is used, do not have your – "RCA": Local site audio is output through the
voice output through the speakers. Audio Out R jack.
• The items are displayed over 2 screens. You – "HDMI": Local site audio will be output to the
can move to the next or previous screen by HDMI(R) connection set in "Audio output
pressing [R] or [B], respectively. terminal". The other site’s audio is output to
1. Select "Audio I/O" and press [ENTER]. HDMI(L).
• The audio input/output settings screen is "Microphone Equaliser": Press [ENTER], and
displayed. then use [ ][ ] to select the type of equalizer to
be used.
2. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input: – "Normal Equaliser" (default): A
"Echo Canceller": Use [ ][ ] to select whether general-purpose equalizer is used.
to enable the echo canceller feature. – "Solve blur Equaliser": An equalizer for
– "ON" (default): Enables the echo canceller improving blur in sound is used.
feature. – "Bass Equaliser": An equalizer for improving
– "OFF": Disables the echo canceller feature. how bass is picked up is used.
"Auto Gain Control": Use [ ][ ] to select "Microphone mute Mode": Press [ENTER], and
whether to enable the auto gain control feature. then use [ ][ ] to select the microphone to mute
– "ON" (default): Enables the auto gain control when a call starts.
feature. – "MIC·Headset·Audio In" (default): The
– "OFF": Disables the auto gain control feature. boundary microphone, headset microphone,
and general-purpose microphone are muted.
Note – "MIC·Headset": The boundary microphone
• In order to set "Auto Gain Control", the and headset microphone are muted.
setting for "Echo Canceller" must be "Main Camera Audio input": Use [ ][ ] to
"OFF". select whether audio will be input from the main
"RCA input gain for Audio": Press [ENTER] and camera during a call.
use [ ][ ] to select the input gain for the Audio – "ON": Audio is input.
In L/R jack (-42 dB to +4 dB) (default: -32 dB). – "OFF" (default): Audio is not input.
Note Note
• The value set for "RCA input gain for • For software versions lower than 4.50,
Audio" will be applied when "Auto Gain "Main Camera Audio input" is displayed
Control" is set to "ON". as "Main Camera Audio input / call".
"Audio output terminal": Press [ENTER] and use "HDMI Audio input / content": Press [ENTER]
[ ][ ] to select audio output for during a video and then use [ ][ ] to select the HDMI terminal
conference call. for audio input.

– "OFF": Audio is not input. • When using a KX-VC1000 that has not
– "Main Camera": Audio is input from the main been expanded for 4 Point Built-in MCU
camera. support, the following items are not
– "Sub Camera": Audio is input from the sub displayed.
camera. – ""MCU Settings" Menu"
– "PC" (default): Audio is input from PC-HDMI. – "Edit Profile"
– "Sub Camera + PC": Audio is input from the
sub camera and PC-HDMI. ""Settings" Menu": Use [ ][ ] to select
"HDMI input gain for Audio": Press [ENTER], and "ON" (default) or "OFF".
then select the audio input gain (+6 dB to -32 dB, • If you select "OFF", the settings screen is not
"OFF") (default: 0 dB). displayed even if you select "Settings" in the
"Output gain for HDMI inp. Audio": Press menu screen.
[ENTER], and then select the audio output gain ""Select local site" Menu": Use [ ][ ] to select
(+6 dB to -32 dB, "OFF") (default: 0 dB).
"ON" (default) or "OFF".
Note • If you select "OFF", the select local site screen
is not displayed even if you select "Select local
• Even when audio input is set for "Main
site" in the menu screen.
Camera Audio input" or "HDMI Audio
input / content", if "HDMI input gain for ""Network Settings" Menu": Use [ ][ ] to
Audio" and "Output gain for HDMI inp. select "ON" (default) or "OFF".
Audio" are set to "OFF", audio will not be • If you select "OFF", the network settings screen
output. is not displayed even if you select "Network
• When "Main Camera" is selected for Settings" in the menu screen.
"HDMI Audio input / content", set "Main ""Call set up" Menu": Use [ ][ ] to select
Camera Audio input" to "ON". "ON" (default) or "OFF".
• When a video camera with a microphone is • If you select "OFF", the connection settings
used, if "Main Camera Audio input" is set screen is not displayed even if you select "Call
to "ON" and "Output gain for HDMI inp. set up" in the menu screen.
Audio" is set to a setting other than ""Camera Settings" Menu": Use [ ][ ] to
"OFF", feedback may occur. select "ON" (default) or "OFF".
• If you select "OFF", the video camera setting
3. Press [G]. screen is not displayed even if you select
• A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings "Camera Settings" in the menu screen.
is displayed. ""MCU Settings" Menu": Use [ ][ ] to select
4. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER]. • If you select "OFF", the MCU setting screen is
• The administrator menu screen is displayed. not displayed even if you select "MCU
Settings" in the menu screen.
"Active Home Menu": Use [ ][ ] to select
Making GUI Settings • If you select "OFF", the guide is not displayed
1. Select "GUI Settings" and press [ENTER]. in the Home screen. Pressing [FULL
• The GUI settings screen is displayed. SCREEN] on the remote control will switch
between displaying/hiding.
2. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input: "Active Camera control Menu": Press [ENTER],
use [ ][ ] to select "Partially Hide" (default) or
Note "Fully Hide".
• The following items are displayed over 2 • This setting determines the result when you
pages. To view all the items, press [R] to press [FULL SCREEN] on the remote control
move to the next page, and press [B] to to hide the guide area while using the camera
move to the previous page. control screen during a video conference.
• ""Y" Button during MCU" is not displayed
for the KX-VC1000.

– "Partially Hide": Everything is hidden 2. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input:
except for the control name and the remote "One Touch Play": Use [ ][ ] to select "ON" or
control’s colour button. "OFF" (default).
– "Fully Hide": All of the guide area is hidden.
"Admin Login Disp. of "Y" Button": Use [ ] Note
[ ] to select whether to display "Admin Login" in • Normally, select "OFF". Changing this
[Y] of the menu screen. settings to "ON" may cause the image to
– "ON" (default): Displays "Admin Login". change automatically depending on the
– "OFF": Does not display "Admin Login". model of the connected video camera.
""Y" Button during MCU": Press [ENTER] and "Standby": Use [ ][ ] to select "ON" (default)
use [ ][ ] to assign a feature to the [Y] button or "OFF".
during MCU.
Note
– "Whisper Mode": Turns Whisper Mode on and
off. • Depending on the connected video camera,
– "Discussion / Presentation" (default): changing this settings to "ON" may cause
Switches the MCU mode. the video camera (Main, Sub) to
""G" Button during call": Press [ENTER] and use synchronise and enter screen standby
[ ][ ] to assign a feature to the [G] button during mode when the unit enters screen standby
calls. mode. Since operation may differ
depending on your video camera model,
– "Aspect Ratio" (default): Changes the
contact your dealer for details.
incoming image aspect ratio during a 2-party
video conference call. 3. Press [G].
– "USB Rec": Starts and stops recording during • A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings
a call. is displayed.
""CAM CTRL" Button": Use [ ][ ] to select
"ON" (default) or "OFF". 4. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER].
• When "OFF" is selected, the [CAM CTRL] • The administrator menu screen is displayed.
button cannot be used during a video
conference call.
"Edit Contact list": Use [ ][ ] to select
"ON" (default) or "OFF". Setting Power Management
• If you select "OFF", items in the contact list
cannot be added, edited, or deleted. Power management can be set to automatically turn the
"Edit Profile": Use [ ][ ] to select HD Visual Communication Unit on or off at specified
times. You can select to turn on or off at a specific day
and time, or turn on or off at the same time every day.
• If you select "OFF", items in the profile cannot
be added, edited, or deleted. Note
• A dialogue box to confirm turning off the unit is
3. Press [G]. displayed about 60 seconds before the time set
• A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings for automatic power off.
is displayed. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" or "No" and press
[ENTER].
– If you select "Yes", the unit turns off without
• The administrator menu screen is displayed. waiting for the set time.
– If you select "No", the unit will turn off at the
next set time rather than the nearest set
time.
Making HDMI Settings If you do not press [ENTER] within 60 seconds,
the unit will turn off at the set time.
1. Select "HDMI Settings" and press [ENTER]. • If the time set from automatic power off to
• The HDMI settings screen is displayed. automatic power on is less than 5 minutes, the
unit will restart instead of turning off and on. In

such cases, the dialogue box to confirm "Time (Power OFF)": Set a time (default: 00:00).
whether to restart will not be displayed. Also, the
unit will turn on automatically at the automatic Note
power on time even if you turn it off manually • You cannot set this if "Auto Power OFF" is
before the unit restarts. "OFF".
• Set the times so that the time from automatic 3. Press [G].
power on to automatic power off is 5 minutes or • A dialogue box to confirm saving the settings is
longer. displayed.
• If the unit is already started at the automatic 4. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER].
power on time, or if there is a call, recording, or
firmware update at the automatic off time, the
unit will turn on or off at the next set time. Note
1. Select "Power Settings" and press [ENTER]. • If you start the unit manually right before the
• The power management settings screen is automatic power off set time, it may not turn off
displayed. at the set time. In such cases, it will turn off at
2. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input: the next set time.
Note
• To turn on (or off) on a specific day, set
"Day Setting" to "ON", "Auto Power
Setting Shortcuts
ON" (or "Auto Power OFF") to "ON", "Day You can quickly access system setting screens by
(Power ON)" (or "Day (Power OFF)"), and setting shortcuts to remote control keys.
"Time (Power ON)" (or "Time (Power
OFF)"). 1. Select "Shortcut Settings" and press [ENTER].
• To turn on (or off) at the same time every • The shortcut settings screen is displayed.
day, set "Day Setting" to "OFF", "Auto
Power ON" (or "Auto Power OFF") to 2. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input:
"ON", and "Time (Power ON)" (or "Time "[B] Shortcut" (default: "Call History")/"[R]
(Power OFF)"). Shortcut" (default: "Contact List")/"[G]
"Day Setting": Use [ ][ ] to select "ON" or Shortcut" (default: "Profile")/"[Y]
"OFF" (default). Shortcut" (default: "—"): Press [ENTER] and use
"Auto Power ON": Use [ ][ ] to select "ON" or [ ][ ] to select the function you want to set.
"OFF" (default). – "—": The shortcut key is not set.
"Day (Power ON)": Press [ENTER] and use [ ] – The following screens can be set.
[ ] to select a day (default: Monday). Call History/Contact List/Profile/System
Settings/Set Date/Time/Network Settings/Call
Note set up/MCU Settings/One-Touch Set./Standby
• You cannot set this if "Day Setting" is Setting/Sound Settings/MIC Setting/Remote
"OFF" or "Auto Power ON" is "OFF". Ctrl ID/Camera Settings/Language Setting/
USB Rec Settings/Multicast Setting/USB
"Time (Power ON)": Set a time (default: 06:00). Device Mode/Enhancement/Network Test/Self
Note Diag./Remote access
• You cannot set this if "Auto Power ON" is Note
"OFF". • Items set to "OFF" in "GUI Settings" are
"Auto Power OFF": Use [ ][ ] to select "ON" also displayed.
or "OFF" (default). • When using a KX-VC1000, "MIC Setting"
"Day (Power OFF)": Press [ENTER] and use [ ] is not displayed as a selection. Additionally,
[ ] to select a day (default: Saturday). when using a KX-VC1000 that has not been
Note "Profile" and "MCU Settings" are not
• You cannot set this if "Day Setting" is displayed.
"OFF" or "Auto Power OFF" is "OFF".

• For software versions lower than 4.50, the Note

default for all shortcut keys is "—". • A mass storage class (FAT16 or FAT32 format)
3. Press [G]. compatible USB memory device can be used
• A dialogue box to confirm the saving of settings with this unit.
is displayed. • The following types of USB memory devices
cannot be used:
4. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER]. – U3 smart drives (USB memory devices
• The administrator menu screen is displayed. compatible with the U3 platform)
– USB memory devices with security features
– USB memory devices formatted using
NTFS
Setting Local Site Selection – USB memory devices with multiple LUNs
(Logical Unit Numbers)
1. Select "Select local site set" and press [ENTER]. – USB memory devices formatted with
• The local site selection settings screen is multiple partitions
displayed. • USB memory devices are not guaranteed to
fully operate. For details, contact your dealer.
2. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input: • To re-connect a USB memory device, make
"Same setting after restart": Select whether to sure to fully remove the USB memory device
use the same local site after restarting. before connecting it again.
– "ON": The local site settings made before • Confirm the USB memory device has sufficient
restarting will be retained. free space (at least 50 MB) before using it.
– "OFF" (default): The local site settings made 1. Connect the USB memory device to the USB jack
before restarting will not be retained. on the back of the unit (Page 23).
"Edit Local site": Select whether to enable the
editing feature on the select local site screen. Note
– "ON" (default): The editing feature is enabled. • Make sure that the USB memory device is
– "OFF": The editing feature is disabled. connected correctly.
Note
2. Select "Export data" and press [ENTER].
• If "OFF" is selected, you cannot add, edit, • The data export screen is displayed.
or delete a local site.
3. Press [G].
is displayed.

Setting Multicast Tree

Perform settings for the multicast function (Page 172).
3. Press [ENTER].
• The data export begins.
Exporting Data Note
The call log, operation log, and contacts list can be • While the data is being exported, do not
saved on a USB memory device. The saved operation remove the USB memory device. This could
log can be used to specify the cause when problems damage the unit or corrupt the data.
occur. For details, contact your dealer.

• The data saved to the USB memory device • A mass storage class (FAT16 or FAT32 format)
will be named "hdvclogall_XXXX.tar". The compatible USB memory device can be used
"XXXX" portion of the file name varies with this unit.
depending on the software version and date • The following types of USB memory devices
of the export. cannot be used:
• The contacts list (address.xml), profile – U3 smart drives (USB memory devices
(profile.xml), configuration data compatible with the U3 platform)
(config.xml), encryption data – USB memory devices with security features
(sec_config.xml), and multicast tree list – USB memory devices formatted using
(alm_config_list.xml) that are included in NTFS
the file "hdvclogall_XXXX.tar" can be – USB memory devices with multiple LUNs
imported into the unit. However, when using (Logical Unit Numbers)
a KX-VC1000 that has not been expanded – USB memory devices formatted with
for 4 Point Built-in MCU support, profile multiple partitions
(profile.xml) cannot be imported.
• USB memory devices are not guaranteed to
• For information about editing the exported fully operate. For details, contact your dealer.
contacts list (address.xml) or profile
• To re-connect a USB memory device, make
(profile.xml), contact your dealer.
sure to fully remove the USB memory device
before connecting it again.
4. Check the result (successful/failed) and press • You can import a startup screen to change the
[ENTER]. default startup screen.
• The administrator menu screen is displayed. 1. Prepare the USB memory device that contains the
data that will be imported.
5. Remove the USB memory device. • The file names of the files that can be imported
are fixed as follows.
Note – Contacts list: address.xml
• To prevent data leakage from the USB memory
– Profile: profile.xml
device, make sure to erase all data from the – Configuration data: config.xml
USB memory device before disposing of, – Encryption data: sec_config.xml
lending, or returning it. – Startup screen: startup.png
– Multicast tree list: alm_config_list.xml
• Store the data to be imported in the root
Importing Data directory of the USB memory device, or in a
folder stored in the root directory (folder names:
The contacts list and other data exported from the unit 01–16).
can be re-imported from a USB memory device. • For the startup screen, use the PNG file format
for an image that is 960 ´ 540 pixels or smaller.
Note
• Encryption data exported from the unit includes Note
login IDs and passwords. Note that when • When using a KX-VC1000 that has not
encryption data is imported, login IDs and been expanded for 4 Point Built-in MCU
passwords may change and login can no longer support, profile (profile.xml) cannot be
be performed. imported.
• When importing data that was exported from a
unit that had profile standby set to 2. Connect the USB memory device to the USB jack
"Permanent", import the profile and on the back of the unit (Page 23).
configuration data together.
• When importing data that was export from the Note
unit that registered the local site information • Make sure that the USB memory device is
(Page 113), import encryption data and connected correctly.
configuration data.

3. Select "Import data" and press [ENTER]. To Register the Registration Key
• The data import screen is displayed. Registering the registration key you acquired activates
the enhanced features.
"USB Directory": Press [ENTER] and use [ ] 1. Select "Enhancement" and press [ENTER].
[ ] to specify the directory that contains the data, • The software enhancement screen is
from "root" (default), or "/01"–"/16". displayed.
"Data": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to specify
Note
the data that will be imported, from "All Data",
"Contact List", "Profile", "Configuration Data", • In "KX-VC Series NAT Traversal
"Encryption Data", "Startup screen", or Service", the registration status of the
"Multicast Tree List". KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service is
displayed.
– "Not registered": The service is not
Note registered or more than 6 months have
• When using a KX-VC1000 that has not passed since the expiration date.
been expanded for 4 Point Built-in MCU – "Expired": Less than 6 months have
support, "Profile" is not displayed as an passed since the service expiration
available selection. date. The service period can be
extended.
5. Press [G].
– "Expiration date is <Day/Month/
• A dialogue box is displayed asking you to
Year> (GMT)": The service has been
confirm the import and that unit will restart after
registered.
the import.
– "Not connected to the NAT Traversal
server": Due to problems such as not
being connected to the network or other
• The unit restarts so that the imported data can network problems, the NAT Traversal
be applied. server could not be connected to. Once
Note communications are established with
the server, the status will automatically
• If the image file is larger than 960 ´ 540 change to service registered status.
pixels in size, the default startup screen will • Features that have already been activated
be displayed. are displayed in "Activated Features", as
• If the image file is smaller than 960 ´ 540 follows:
pixels in size, it will be displayed centered – "4 Point Built-in MCU": An expansion
on the screen. feature is enabled for the built-in MCU.
(For the KX-VC1000, 2 parties are
expanded to 4 parties. For the
Activating Enhanced Features KX-VC1600, 6 parties are expanded to
10 parties. For the KX-VC2000, 16
You can activate features by enhancing the unit’s parties are expanded to 20 or 24
software. To activate the feature, you must obtain a parties. When the KX-VC2000 is
registration key from your dealer. First, provide your expanded to 24 parties, "4 Point
dealer with the Activation Key No. and Registration ID Built-in MCU" is displayed in 2 lines.)
written on the activation key, and the unit’s MPR ID. The – "Multicast": The multicast enhanced
dealer will enter this information into the Key feature is enabled.
Management System and then issue you with the – "Mobile Connection": The mobile
registration key. connection enhanced feature is
enabled.
To Confirm the MPR ID
– "HDMI Dual Monitor": HDMI2 is
1. Select "Enhancement" and press [ENTER]. available for the KX-VC1000.
• The software enhancement screen is – "PC Peripheral": PC Peripheral is
displayed. Check the field "MPR ID". enabled.

– "None": No features have been 2. Use [ ][ ] to select "Update Method" and press
activated. [ENTER].
2. Press [G]. 3. Use [ ][ ] to select "Network" or "USB" and

• The registration key input screen is displayed. press [ENTER].
– "Network": Updates the software from the
3. Enter the 16-digit registration key. network.
– "USB": Updates the software from a USB
4. Press [G]. memory device.
Note
and system restart after saving is displayed.
• If you want to select "USB", contact your
5. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER]. dealer for the details.
changes to system settings. 4. When "Automatic Version Check" is set to
"ON" (Page 141):
Note The latest software version is displayed next to
• If the registration key you entered is invalid, "Available Software version :". Proceed to step
"Failed Registration Key code 5 if there is an update available.
authentication." is displayed. Repeat the When "Automatic Version Check" is set to
procedure from step 3. If this message is "OFF" (Page 141) or when "Update Method" is
displayed even when you have correctly set to "USB" in step 3:
input the registration key that was issued, Use [ ][ ] to select "Version Confirmation"
contact your dealer. and press [ENTER].
• Only one registration key can be registered • The system checks for version updates. The
at once. To register multiple registration latest software version will be displayed next to
keys for enabling multiple features, a restart "Available Software version :". Proceed to
is necessary for each registration. step 5 if there is an update available.
• Activated features can also be checked on
the enhanced feature confirmation screen 5. Use [ ][ ] to select "Update Software Now"
(Page 133). and press [ENTER].
• A dialogue box to confirm the updating of your
software is displayed.
Updating Software Note
Note • Please carefully read and confirm the
cautions in the dialogue box before
• If you want to update software using a USB proceeding to the next step.
memory device, consult your dealer.
• When updating software using a USB memory
device, note the following. 6. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER].
– Save the software update file in the root • The update is automatically downloaded and
directory of the USB memory device. installed.
– Do not change the name of the software • To complete the update, the system will
update file. automatically restart. Before restart, a message
– Connect the USB memory device to the will be displayed as detailed below.
USB jack on the back of the unit ahead of
time.
1. Select "Software update" and press [ENTER].
• The software update screen is displayed.

The message displayed before the restart 1. Select "Camera Initialize" and press [ENTER].
• The video camera initialisation screen is
displayed.
2. Use [ ][ ] to select the video camera to be

initialised ("Main" [default] or "Sub").
3. Press [R].
• A dialogue box confirming whether you want to
start the video camera initialisation is displayed.

• After the initialisation is complete, the
After the restart, the system will start up with the administrator menu screen is displayed.
latest software.
Note
• Contact your dealer for more information on
Performing System
obtaining the latest firmware and User Manual. Initialisation
• If the checking, downloading, or installing of a
software update fails, an error message is 1. Select "System Initialize" and press [ENTER].
displayed. Press [ENTER] to restart the • A dialogue box confirming whether you want to
system. start the system initialisation is displayed.
Please try the following:
a. Check the settings for "DNS Server" or 2. Use [ ][ ] to select "Yes" and press [ENTER].
"Primary DNS Server" in network settings • The system will automatically restart to
(Page 118). Then, try updating the software complete the system initialisation.
again.
Note
When "DNS Server" is set to "Auto", the • After initialisation, all system settings
DHCP server may be the cause of the previously made and information stored in
problem. In this case, contact your network the contact list, profile, local site, and call
administrator. history are cleared.
b. If the above step is unsuccessful, try • The updated startup screen data has been
updating the software again later. The damaged due to a data import operation
network may be currently very busy. (Page 157).
If the retry fails several times, there might be a • Features activated due to software
problem with your communication lines. Please enhancement (Page 158) are not cleared.
• Software cannot be updated when using IPv6
addresses.
Initialising a Video Camera

Note
• Initialisation is available only for video cameras
connected to your unit and only when you are
not on a video conference call.
• For details about compatible video camera
models, contact your dealer.

Setting Remote Access

You can set the settings required to remotely access the unit.
Note
• Changes made to the "Web port permanently enabled", "Web port Number", "telnet port
permanently enabled", and "telnet port Number" settings are applied after restarting the unit.
1. Select "Remote access Set." and press [ENTER].
• The remote access setting screen is displayed.
2. Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input.

"Change Password": Use [ ][ ] to select whether to change the password from the default.
– "ON": Changes the password.
– "OFF" (default): Does not change the password.
Note
• This password is used for controlling the unit remotely, and is different from the password used for
administrator login (page 140).
"Current password": Enter the current password (default: HDVC_admin).
"New password": Enter the new password.
"Retype new password": Enter the new password again.
Note
• Passwords must be from 8 to 32 characters in length, and be comprised of at least 2 types of
characters from the alphabet, numbers, and symbols.
• The default password (HDVC_admin) cannot be entered for "New password".
• Take care with managing the password.
• Passwords cannot be entered when "Change Password" is set to "OFF".
"Web port permanently enabled": Use [ ][ ] to select whether to permanently enable the web port.
– "ON": Permanently enables the web port.
– "OFF" (default): Does not permanently enable the web port.
Note
• When "ON" is selected, the password must be changed from the default.
• When "ON" is selected, the unit can be permanently accessed remotely via a web port. Take
precautions against unintended access by doing actions such as periodically changing the
password.
"Web port Number": When the web port is permanently enabled, set the port number (80, 8000 to 8999).
(Default: 80)
"telnet port permanently enabled": Use [ ][ ] to select whether to permanently enable the telnet port.
– "ON": Permanently enables the telnet port.
– "OFF" (default): Does not permanently enable the telnet port.
Note
• When "ON" is selected, the password must be changed from the default.
• When "ON" is selected, the unit can be permanently accessed remotely via a telnet port. Take
precautions against unintended access by doing actions such as periodically changing the
password.
"telnet port Number": When the telnet port is permanently enabled, set the port number (23, 20000 to
29999). (Default: 23)

3. Press [G].

Using the KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service
Preparations for Connections

Service Period Overview
To use this service, registration is necessary. By registering using the activation key included with the product,
you can use this service for 3 months at no charge. The service period starts as soon as registration is complete
(i.e., after completing the procedure explained in "Activating Enhanced Features (Page 158)"). The service
period will be effective on the whole day (until midnight when the date changes) 3 months from the start of the
service period.
Example 1: Registration is completed on April 1

Whole day, July 1
April 1 (Until midnight, July 2)
Available Service Period
Example 2: Registration is completed on December 15

Whole day, March 15
December 15 (Until midnight, March 16)
Available Service Period
Note
• You can check the service expiration date using the unit. For details, see "Checking Enhanced
Features (Page 133)".
To continue using this service after the trial service period has ended, you must purchase an activation key to
extend the service period. The length of the service period depends on the card. For details about the card,
For details about the procedure for extending the service period, see "Extending the Service Period
(Page 168)".
Security Overview
This service uses a standard Internet connection, so if encryption is not enabled, it is possible for others to
listen in on your conversation. It is strongly recommended that you enable encryption when you use this service.
For details about enabling encryption, see "Making Encryption Settings (Page 140)".
KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service Setup Procedure

This is the procedure required for setting up operation of the KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service. See each
setting item for details.
1 Set up the Operating Environment (Page 165)

2 Obtain a Registration Key (Page 165) (using a computer)
3 Perform the settings necessary for using the KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service (Page 142).
(Unit operations)
4 Register the Registration Key (Page 158) (using the unit)
5 Video conference call over KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service
6 Extend the Service Period of KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service (Page 168) (using a
computer)
Note
• Operations in "Obtain a Registration Key (Page 165)" and "Extending the Service Period
(Page 168)" must be performed by your dealer. For details, contact your dealer.

Connect to the Internet Obtain a Registration Key

To use KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service, a network In this procedure, you will use a computer to access the
environment and devices that meet the following KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service registration page
specifications are necessary. and obtain a Registration Key. The following
information is necessary:
• MPR ID
Network Environment – This can be confirmed on the label on the
To use KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service to bottom of the unit or through operating the unit.
establish video conference calls, a broadband For details, see "To check the MPR ID (using
connection is required. (A 3-party video conference call the unit) (Page 165)".
requires a 1.0 Mbps connection, and a 4-party video • Activation Key No.
conference call requires a 2.0 Mbps connection.) – Recorded on an activation key.
• Registration ID
– Recorded on an activation key.
Router
Please use a router that has been tested by Panasonic
for use with this service, and use the information from To check the MPR ID (using the
your provider to connect to the Internet. For details
about tested routers, refer to the following web site: unit)
https://panasonic.net/cns/psn/products/hdvc/ 1. Press [MENU].
nat/nat_traversal/index.html • The Menu screen is displayed.
For details about configuring your router, refer to the
router’s documentation.
2. Use [ ][ ] to select "Settings" and press
[ENTER].
To connect the unit and router
1. Connect the router to the LAN1 jack on the back of • The system settings screen is displayed.
the unit.
• Connect a router to the LAN1 jack on the back 3. Press [ ][ ] to display the fourth page.
of the unit using a category 5 or greater LAN
cable. (For the LAN1 jack position, refer to 4. Use [ ][ ] to select "Enhancement" and press
"Main Unit (Back)" in "Part Names and [ENTER].
Usage (Page 22)".) • The enhanced feature confirmation screen is
displayed. Check the field "MPR ID" (A).
Note
A
• Operation cannot be guaranteed in the
following cases:
– You are using a router other than one
tested by Panasonic.
– Multiple HD Visual Communication
Units are connected to one router.
– The HD Visual Communication Unit is
connected directly to the Internet, and
not through a router.
5. Press [Home].

To obtain a Registration Key 3. Click "Apply new" next to HDVC.
(using a computer)
Note
• The following operating systems and web
browsers are supported:
Microsoft Windows 7 operating system
– Microsoft Windows Internet Explorer 8/10
web browser
– Internet Explorer 10
– Mozilla® Firefox® web browser
1. From a computer, access the KX-VC Series NAT • The new application screen is displayed.
Traversal Service registration page
(https://www2.tsunagarunet.com/hdcom/main). 4. Fill in the following items:
Note
• The login screen is displayed in English.
You can change the language from the
drop-down list in the upper right of the
screen.
2. Enter the characters displayed in the image, and

then click "Apply".
"MPR ID"
"Activation Key No."
"Registration ID"
5. Click "Next".
• The Terms of Use screen is displayed.
6. Read the Terms of Use thoroughly, and if you agree

to the terms, click "Accept".
• The Terminal ID selection screen is displayed.
7. Select the Terminal ID you want to use, and then

• The function selection screen is displayed. click "Next".
Note
• The fields are case sensitive.

• The information confirmation screen is To display the Registration Key

displayed.
again (using a computer)
Note
If you misplace the Registration Key information, you
• Clicking "Click to Show next Terminal
can display it again by following the procedure below.
IDs" displays more Terminal IDs available
for use. You can repeat this operation up to 1. From a computer, access the KX-VC Series NAT
5 times. Once you click "Click to Show Traversal Service registration page
next Terminal IDs", Terminal IDs that have (https://www2.tsunagarunet.com/hdcom/main).
been displayed up to that point cannot be • The login screen is displayed.
recalled. Note
8. Click "Register". You can change the language from the
• The value displayed on the screen in drop-down list in the upper right of the
"Registration Key" (16 characters) must be screen.
registered to the unit. Make a printout of the
page or write down the Registration Key on the
activation key or another piece of paper and 2. Enter the characters displayed in the image, and
store it in a safe place. then click "here" at the bottom of the screen.
IMPORTANT
• The unit information login screen is displayed.
• If you misplace the Registration Key
information, refer to "To display the Note
Registration Key again (using a computer) • The fields are case sensitive.
(Page 167)".
3. Fill in the following items:
9. Click "Menu".
• The function selection screen is displayed.
"Type": select HDVC

"MPR ID"

"Activation Key No." Extending the Service Period

"Registration ID"
To extend the service period, it is necessary to
4. Click "Next". purchase an activation key. The duration of the
extension differs according to the card purchased. For
• The unit information screen is displayed. Check
details about cards, contact your dealer.
the "Registration Key" information on the
screen. When you are finished, close the Note
browser.
• If the service period is extended while the
service period is still in effect, the duration of the
extension is added to the current service period.
Example: During a 3-month duration service
period, the service period is extended by 1 year.
Whole day, April 1 Whole day, April 2
(Until midnight, the following year
April 2) (Until midnight,
Jan 1 Mar 1 April 3)
Service Period: 3 months
Extended by: 1 year Duration: 1 year
Service Period: 1 year and 3 months
• If the service period is extended within 6 months

following the expiration of a service period, the
service period begins at the time the extension
is performed.
1. From a computer, access the KX-VC Series NAT
Traversal Service registration page
(https://www2.tsunagarunet.com/hdcom/main).
Note
You can change the language from the
drop-down list in the upper right of the
screen.

2. Enter the characters displayed in the image, and "Activation Key No.": Input the Activation Key No.
then click "Apply". printed on the activation key purchased for the
service period extension.
"Registration ID": Input the Registration ID printed
on the activation key purchased for the service
period extension.
5. Click "Next".
• The Terms of Use screen is displayed.
6. Read the Terms of Use thoroughly, and if you agree

to the terms, click "Accept".
• The extension confirmation screen is displayed.
7. Click "Register".
Note
• The fields are case sensitive.
3. Click "Extension of period" next to HDVC.
• The extension completion screen is displayed.
Note
• To register another activation key, click
"Register New" and repeat steps 4 to 7.
• The total amount of the service period that
can be registered using activation keys at
one time is 6 years, which includes the
amount of time remaining in the currently
active service period. An activation key
• The extension of period screen is displayed.
cannot be registered if doing so would
extend the total service period beyond 6
4. Fill in the following items:
years.
8. Click "Menu".
9. Press the unit’s power button to turn it off, and then

on to restart the unit.
• The extended service period is reflected on the
unit.
10. Press [MENU].

"MPR ID": Input the MPR ID of the unit that you
want to extend the service period for.
11. Use [ ][ ] to select "Settings" and press
[ENTER].

12. Press [ ] three times.

• The fourth page is displayed.
13. Use [ ][ ] to select "Enhancement" and press

[ENTER].
• The enhanced feature confirmation screen is
displayed. Check the field "KX-VC Series NAT
Traversal Service", and confirm that the
service period has been extended.
14. Press [Home].


Using Mobile Connection Enhanced Features
U
Using Mobile Connection Enhanced Features

i
When mobile connection is enabled for an HD Visual Communication Unit using an activation key, the mobile
o
devices can connect to the unit, but enhanced features for mobile devices are not enabled (Page 158).
b
i
Conditions for connecting an HD Visual Communication Unit to a mobile device
l
When Using Mobile

When not Using Mobile Connection
e
Connection
C
o
Required HD Visual Communication HD Visual Communication HD Visual Communication
n
Enhanced Unit: mobile connection Unit: NAT Traversal Unit: none
n
Features Mobile device: none Mobile device: NAT Mobile device: NAT
e
Traversal Traversal
c
Connection IP Mode IP Mode IP Mode

t
modes usable IP/NAT Traversal Mode NAT Traversal Mode IP/NAT Traversal Mode
i
for (using IP Mode) IP/NAT Traversal Mode (using IP Mode)

o
communication
n
Maximum number of mobile devices that can connect using mobile connection
n
• KX-VC1000: 1 unit
• KX-VC1000 (when using the 4 Point Built-in MCU enhanced feature): 3 units
h
• KX-VC1300: 3 units
a
n
c
d
F
e
• KX-VC2000 (when using the 4 Point Built-in MCU enhanced feature 2 times): 23 units
a
t
Note
u
• In order to use mobile connection with a connectable mobile device, its software version must be
r
3.10 or later.
e
• In this manual, "HDVC Mobile" refers to a mobile device that uses enhanced features to connect with
s
the HD Visual Communication Unit.

Using Multicast
U
Using Multicast
i
About Multicast
u
Multicast is a one-way communication service that allows one HD Visual Communication Unit to multicast
t
video and audio to other multiple units, which receive the communication and show it.
i
The data received and shown by a unit can also be sent along to other units, as the receiving unit can function
c
as a relay terminal. Each unit can relay data to 2 other units, and in a configuration with 5 layers of relays, a
a
system of 31 units can be established.

s
A multicast system is composed of the following terminals.

t
• Multicast terminal: The top-level terminal that multicasts video and audio
• Relay terminal: Receives video and audio from a higher-level terminal and relays it to a lower-lever terminal.
(The received contents are also shown at the relay terminal.)
• Receiver terminal: Receives video and audio.
Receiver terminal
Relay terminal
Multicast terminal
Maximum 31 units
(multicast terminal: 1 unit, relay terminals/receiver terminals: 30 units)

Using Multicast
The multicast feature, compared to usage of an MCU, can reduce the network bandwidth used at the multicast
terminal’s sites. When a transmission failure occurs during the multicast, the configuration of the terminals will
automatically change, so it is necessary that all terminals can connect and communicate with each other over
the network.
Note
• In order to use the multicast feature, all HD Visual Communication Units that will comprise the multicast
system must have a Multicast activation key (KX-VCS302) installed.
• The multicast feature will not operate when using IPv6 addresses.
• To enable "Multicast" in "Enhancement", be sure to assign an IPv4 address to the unit in "Network
Settings". In cases where an IPv4 address is not assigned, such as when "IP Address (LAN
1)" (setting) is set to "Auto", but the status "Address is not assigned" is displayed, communication
using an IPv6 address cannot occur.
• The multicast feature will not operate when using IP Mode (H.323).
• The multicast feature will not operate when using NAT Traversal Mode.
• The multicast data cannot be encrypted.
• Connection using a SIP server cannot be performed.
• When configuring a system of 32 or more units, a multicast server is required. For details, contact your
dealer.
Multicast Operation
Starting Multicast
In order to perform multicasting, multicast tree settings must first be set (Page 174, Page 175). When the
multicast is started from the multicast tree setting screen, connections are established with the lower level
terminals and then the multicast will begin (Page 179).
If a lower-level terminal’s power is not on, or there is a network failure, and there is no response for the
connection confirmation, the configuration of the multicast tree will automatically change, and then the multicast
will begin. If a terminal that was removed from the configuration at startup responds with a connection
confirmation during the multicast, the multicast tree will automatically re-add the terminal and multicast data
to it.
Ending the Multicast

Press [END] at the multicast terminal to end the multicast.
Handling of Trouble During a Multicast

If a relay terminal loses its ability to connect to the multicast due to problems such as network trouble, the
multicast tree will automatically adjust and continue the multicast.

Using Multicast
The Multicast Tree

Set the multicast tree to perform the multicast. The multicast tree defines the positions of terminals within the
multicast system. The position of terminals within the multicast tree are displayed using node IDs, and their
positional relationships are as follows.
Multicast terminal Receiver terminal
0 1 3 7 15
23
11 19
27
5 9 17
25
13 21
29
2 4 8 16
24
12 20
28
6 10 18
26
14 22
30
About the Network

The multicast terminal and relay terminals multicast data to up to 2 terminals, so all terminals in the multicast
system must have bandwidth twice that of the multicast maximum bandwidth (1/1.2/2/3/4/5 Mbps). The
recommended resolutions for the multicast maximum bandwidth are as follows.
Maximum resolution
Maximum bandwidth
Full HD HD
(1080/30p) (720/60p)
5 Mbps recommended
4 Mbps recommended
3 Mbps recommended
2 Mbps recommended recommended
1.2 Mbps recommended
1 Mbps recommended

Using Multicast
Note
• During the multicast, if the connection bandwidth drops, the sending bandwidth will drop as well,
lowering the resolution and/or the frame rate.
• The quality of the multicast video and audio is affected by packet round trip time (RTT), the packet loss
ratio, and the number of packets re-sent. Terminals store approximately 1 second of data for resending,
but if sending/receiving is delayed beyond this, the image may become corrupted. For details on
network design that takes into account issues such as round trip time and the packet loss ratio, contact
your dealer.
Setting the System
Setting Multicast
1. In step 3 of "Changing System Settings/Performing System Maintenance (Page 115)", select "Multicast
Setting" and press [ENTER].
• The multicast setting screen is displayed.
2. Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to select the microphone of the multicast terminal to use for the multicast
feature.
– "MIC·Audio In" (default): Audio is input from both the Boundary Microphone and the RCA inputs.
– "Audio In": Audio is input from the RCA inputs.
Note
• "Multicast Setting" can be configured when "Multicast" in "Enhancement" is enabled.
Making Administrator Menu Settings
Registering the Multicast Tree

Sets the terminals and multicast conditions registered for the multicast tree. Up to 10 multicast trees can be
registered.
Note
• "Multicast Tree Set." is available when "Multicast" is enabled for "Enhancement".
New Registration
1. In step 7 of "Administrator Menu List (Page 136)", select "Multicast Tree Set." and press [ENTER].
• The multicast tree screen is displayed.
2. Use [ ][ ] to select ""Not Registered"".

Using Multicast
3. Press [B].
• The multicast tree setting screen is displayed.

"Multicast Name": Enter the multicast tree name (maximum 24 characters) (Page 190).
"Max. Bandwidth": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to select the maximum bandwidth to be used for the
multicast (1.0/1.2/2.0/3.0/4.0/5.0 Mbps) (default: 5.0 Mbps).
Note
• All terminals registered to the multicast tree must have twice the available bandwidth as set in
"Max. Bandwidth".
• In "Call set up", the values for "Max. Bandwidth", "Max. Bandwidth Per Site", "Max.
Bandwidth Per Site (LAN 1)", and "Max. Bandwidth Per Site (LAN 2)" have no effect on the
maximum bandwidth used for multicasting.
"Max. Resolution": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to select "Full HD" (default) or "HD".
Note
• When the bandwidth of the connection used during the multicast drops, the resolution and/or frame
rate of the multicast data may lower.
"Multicast Default Video": Press [ENTER] and use [ ][ ] to select the video to send when the multicast
starts.
– "Main Camera" (default): The video of the main camera is sent.
– "Sub Camera": The video of the sub camera is sent.
– "PC": The image of the PC is sent.
Note
• Performing contents sharing operations can change the video being sent during a multicast
(Page 89).
"Multicast Def. Noise reduction": Use [ ][ ] to select whether noise reduction is enabled when the
multicast starts.
– "ON" (default): Noise reduction is enabled.
– "OFF": Noise reduction is disabled.
Note
• "Multicast Def. Noise reduction" is not displayed for the KX-VC1000.
"MIC detection": Use [ ][ ] to select the microphone status display.

– "ON": Displays the microphone status.
– "OFF" (default): Hides the microphone status.

Using Multicast
"IP Address": Input the IP address of the multicast terminal at the top of the multicast tree.
Note
• If the value for "IP Address" contains 1 or 2 digit numbers, enter these numbers as they are. Do
not enter values such as ".001".
Correct entry: [192.168.0.1]
Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001]
5. Use [ ][ ] to select "Target" and press [ENTER].
• The multicast target screen is displayed.
Note
• If no multicast targets with a " " mark displayed are registered in the selection column, the multicast
will not begin when [START] is pressed.
• When "LAN 2" is set to "OFF" (Page 120), or when using a KX-VC1000/KX-VC1300, the LAN
column is not displayed.
• If [ ] is displayed in a target's LAN column, multicasting will not start when you press [START].
The IP address specified for "IP Address" (Page 177) is an IP address of a network that the target
cannot communicate with. Confirm the target's IP address.
6. Use [ ][ ] to select the ""Not Registered"" target with the lowest node ID, and then press [B].
• A dialogue box is displayed for selecting the input method.
When "Input Address" is selected
• The address input screen is displayed.
Use [ ][ ] to select the following items for input:

"Multicast Target Name": Input the multicast target name (maximum 24 characters) (Page 190).
"IP Address": Enter the IP address.

Using Multicast
Press [G].
Note
• Only IPv4 addresses can be used for the multicast feature.
When "Contact list" is selected

Use [ ][ ] to select the other party to register and press [ENTER].
Note
• To continue registering multicast targets, repeat the procedure from step 6.
• Register multicast targets starting from the lowest available node ID. The node ID of a ""Not
Registered"" target cannot be selected for registration if it is not the lowest available number.
7. Press [G].
Note
• To continue registering multicast trees, repeat steps 2–8 of the procedure.
Editing Registered Contents

2. Use [ ][ ] to select the multicast tree to edit.
3. Press [B].
4. Use [ ][ ] to select the item to edit, and then edit it.

5. Press [G].

Using Multicast
Deleting Registered Contents

2. Use [ ][ ] to select the multicast tree to delete.
3. Press [R].
• A dialogue box to confirm the deletion is displayed.
Starting a Multicast
Starting a Multicast
Select a multicast tree from the list of up to 10 preset multicast trees (1–10) and start the multicast.
2. Use [ ][ ] to select the multicast tree to use for the multicast.
3. Press [START].
• The multicast preparation screen is displayed, and when connection confirmations for lower-level
terminals are completed, the multicast will start.
Note
• If [END] is pressed during multicast preparation, the multicast will be cancelled.
• If no response is received from a lower-level terminal for a connection confirmation for
approximately 1 minute, the multicast tree will adjust and then the multicast will start.
4. To end the multicast, press [END].
Starting a Multicast by Selecting the Multicast Target

Select a multicast target from the multicast target list registered in advance to the multicast tree, and start the
multicast.
2. Use [ ][ ] to select the multicast tree to use for the multicast, and press [B].

Using Multicast
3. Use [ ][ ] to select "Target" and press [ENTER].

4. Use [ ][ ] to select a multicast target and press [ENTER].

• The " " mark in the selection column will be added or removed. The multicast will start for the multicast
targets displaying a " " mark.
Note
• If no multicast targets with a " " mark displayed are registered in the selection column, the multicast
will not begin when [START] is pressed.
• If [ ] is displayed in a target's LAN column, multicasting will not start when you press [START].
The IP address specified for "IP Address" (Page 177) is an IP address of a network that the target
cannot communicate with. Confirm the target's IP address.
5. Press [START].
• The multicast preparation screen is displayed, and when connection confirmations for lower-level
terminals are completed, the multicast will start.
Note
• If [END] is pressed during multicast preparation, the multicast will be cancelled.
• If no response is received from a lower-level terminal for a connection confirmation for
approximately 1 minute, the multicast tree will adjust and then the multicast will start.
6. To end the multicast, press [END].

Using Multicast
Confirming the Transmission Status During a Multicast (Multicast

Terminal)
1 Press [STATUS].
• The multicast information screen is displayed.
1
2 Use [ ][ ] to select a multicast target and press

[ENTER].
• The communication status of the selected multicast
target is displayed.
Note
• When [G] is pressed, the displayed party changes.
• When automatic adjustment for the multicast tree occurs, the adjusted node IDs are displayed in
"Current" of "Node ID (Set / Current)".

Using Multicast
Confirming the Transmission Status During a Multicast (Relay

Terminal/Receiver Terminal)
1 Press [STATUS].
• The multicast information screen is displayed.
1
Starting and Stopping Recording During a Multicast

1. Press [MENU].
• The multicast menu is displayed.
2. Select "USB Rec" and press [ENTER].
When not recording: A dialogue box to confirm starting recording is displayed. Use [ ][ ] to select
"Yes" or "No" and press [ENTER].
– Selecting "Yes" starts recording.
– Selecting "No" does not start recording.
When recording: A dialogue box to confirm stopping recording is displayed. Use [ ][ ] to select
"Yes" or "No" and press [ENTER].
– Selecting "No" does not stop recording.

Using USB Recording Features
U

i
• Record video and audio during a call, multicast, or while idle on a USB memory device connected to the
S
back of the unit.

B
• You can continue recording a different transmission status. For example, you can start recording while idle,
R
and then start and end a call while recording.

e
• To use USB recording features, set "USB Rec" to "ON" in "Security Settings" (Page 149). Also configure
c
recording related settings in "Making Recording Settings (Page 132)".

o
r
Note
d
• If the multicast terminal is KX-VC300/KX-VC500/KX-VC600, you cannot record with relay and receiver
i
terminals.
n
About USB Memory

F
• A mass storage class (FAT16 or FAT32 format) compatible USB memory device can be used with this
unit.
e
• The following types of USB memory devices cannot be used:

a
– U3 smart drives (USB memory devices compatible with the U3 platform)

t
– USB memory devices with security features

u
– USB memory devices formatted using NTFS

r
s
– USB memory devices with multiple LUNs (Logical Unit Numbers)
– USB memory devices formatted with multiple partitions
About USB Memory Devices and Recording Operations
• If a USB memory device is not connected when recording starts, a dialogue box to confirm a USB memory
device connection is displayed. Press [ENTER], connect a USB memory device, and start recording again.
A similar dialogue box is also displayed when the USB memory device cannot be recognized. Replace it
with another USB memory device and start recording again.
• If there is insufficient free space in the USB memory device when recording starts, a dialogue box notifying
that recording cannot start is displayed. Press [ENTER], replace the USB memory device with another
one, and start recording again.
• If the amount of free space in the USB memory device becomes low while recording, a dialogue box to
select whether to continue or stop recording is displayed.
– Selecting "No" continues recording.
When there is no free space, recording is stopped automatically and a dialogue box notifying recording
has been stopped is displayed.
Press [ENTER], replace the USB memory device with another one, and start recording again.
• If the USB memory device is removed while recording, a dialogue box is displayed and recording is stopped.
However, recordings up to 5 minutes before removal are not saved. Also, files may get corrupted and may
not be able to play back properly. Do not remove the USB memory device while recording.
• If the AC power turns off while recording, files in the USB memory device may get corrupted and may not
be able to play back properly. Do not turn off the AC power while recording.
About Recorded Data

• When recording starts, a file named "vc_DATE_TIME.mp4" is created in the root directory.
Example) When recording starts on December 1, 2017, 13:30:30: vc_20171201_133030.mp4
• If the continuous recording time exceeds 4 hours (2 hours in high-quality mode), the subsequent recording
is automatically saved in a new file. The name of the new file contains the date and time when the recording
file was switched.
• The following are the main specifications.

Item Specification
File format mp4 Version 1.0

Video rate/maximum size About 512 kbps (Video Quality: Low)/1.1 GB
(per file) About 1 Mbps (Video Quality: Medium)/2.0 GB
About 2 Mbps (Video Quality: High)/2.0 GB
Maximum recording time of Video Quality Low/Medium: 4 hours
one file Video Quality High: 2 hours
Necessary capacity per hour Video Quality Low: About 0.27 GB
of recording Video Quality Medium: About 0.5 GB
Video Quality High: About 1 GB
Video recording format H.264 High Profile
1280´720, 30 fps*1 (maximum)
Audio recording format MPEG-4 AAC-LC 64kbps monaural
Playback environment Windows Media Player Ver.12
(supported media players) QuickTime Player Ver.10.4 (MAC)
*1
25 fps when the unit's video frequency is 50 Hz.
Note
• The bitrate recorded on a USB memory device is the total of the video rate and audio rate (64 kbps).
About Recording While Idle

• Some operations and settings that can be executed while idle will not be available when recording while
idle.
• The unit will not enter screen standby mode when recording while idle.
• If you turn off the unit by pressing the power button on the unit or remote control when recording while idle,
recording is stopped and the unit turns off.
About Recordable Video

Video that can be recorded differs between KX-VC1000/KX-VC1300/KX-VC1600 and KX-VC2000.
KX-VC1000/KX-VC1300/KX-VC1600
• If "Video Output" in "Video Output" is set to "HDMI 1"
– Single-screen display: Records the same video as HDMI1.
– PwithP or SideBySide display: Records only the main video on the left side in full-screen display.
Note
• For PinP display, the small screen displayed inside is not recorded.
• If "Video Output" in "Video Output" is set to "HDMI 1 / HDMI 2", the video set for "Dual Display Rec
screen" in "USB Rec Settings" is recorded.
KX-VC2000
• If "Video Output" in "Video Output" is set to "HDMI 1", the same video as HDMI1 is recorded.
• If "Video Output" in "Video Output" is set to "HDMI 1 / HDMI 2", the video set for "Dual Display Rec
screen" in "USB Rec Settings" is recorded.
About Recordable Audio

• While idle
Records the audio of its own site.

• During a call
– Main site: Records the audio of the loudest four sites and its own site. If its own site is included in the
loudest four sites, the audio of the four sites is recorded.
– Sub site: Records the audio of its own site and the main site (including the audio of other sub sites
combined by the main site).
• During a multicast
Records only the audio of the multicast terminal.

Using USB Device Mode
U

i
You can use a video camera or microphone connected to the HD Visual Communication Unit as a video camera
S
or microphone for calls in general conference applications installed on a computer.

B
D
Note
e
• Use the activation key of the PC Peripheral (KX-VCZ501) to enable USB Device Mode. Also, refer to
v
"Setting the USB Device Mode (Page 132)" to switch modes and configure related settings.
i
• You cannot make or receive calls while in USB Device Mode*1. The unit will also not enter screen
c
standby mode.
e
• You cannot connect a USB memory device to the USB jack and use it while in USB Device Mode*1.
M
*1
USB Device Mode is when "USB Device Mode" is set to "ON" (Page 133), regardless of whether or not the unit is connected
o
to a computer.
About Connections
d
Connect the computer and HD Visual Communication Unit as shown below.
Note
• Make sure to use the proprietary USB conversion cable (PGWD1933ZAJ1) included with the activation
key (KX-VCZ501).
Proprietary USB conversion cable

USB cable
(included with KX-VCZ501)
(commercially available)
HDMI cable (commercially available)
USB cable connections

Proprietary USB conversion cable
USB cable (commercially available)
(included with KX-VCZ501) HD Visual
Communication
PC
Unit
USB [A] male USB [B] male USB [B] female USB [A] male
About Specifications
The following are the main specifications.
Item Specification
Video Standard UVC Version 1.0

Video format Motion JPEG
Resolution 640 ´ 480 (maximum 30 fps*1)
1280 ´ 720 (maximum 15 fps*2)

Item Specification
Audio Standard UAC Version 1.0

Audio format PCM/16bits/32kbps
Supported OS Microsoft Windows 7 SP2
Microsoft Windows 8.1 operating system
*1
Up to 25 fps when the unit's video frequency is 50 Hz.
*2
Up to 12.5 fps when the unit's video frequency is 50 Hz.
Note
• If the computer goes into sleep, is locked, or goes into hibernate while using USB Device Mode, the
video camera/microphone of the HD Visual Communication Unit may not be able to be used with the
computer. In this case, perform one of the following operations.
– Disconnect and then reconnect the USB cable
– Set "USB Device Mode" to "OFF" and then set it again to "ON" (Page 133)
• If the USB cable is disconnected and the reconnected while general conference applications installed
on a computer are operating, the video camera/microphone of the HD Visual Communication Unit may
not be able to be used with the computer. In this case, perform one or both of the following operations.
– Restart the general conference applications
– Set "USB Device Mode" to "OFF" and then set it again to "ON" (Page 133)

Miscellaneous
M
Changing the Remote Control Batteries

s
For users in Taiwan only

l
1. Open the cover.
2. Take out the R6 (AA) batteries.

3. Insert new batteries (R6 [AA] dry cell), minus side first, then close the cover.

Miscellaneous
Cleaning the Unit

When cleaning the unit, make sure the power is off and all cables are unplugged. Cleaning the unit while the
power is on may cause electric shock.
• Wipe the unit with a dry, soft cloth.

When the unit is very dirty, first clean it with a neutral, household cleaning agent using a well-wrung, damp
cloth. Then, wipe down the unit with a dry, soft cloth.
• Do not use the following when cleaning the unit. They may cause unit discolouration or damage.
– Petroleum
– Scouring powder
– Alcohol
– Thinner
– Benzine
– Wax
– Hot water
– Powder soap
• If using a chemically treated cleaning cloth, be sure to follow all accompanying directions and warnings.

Input
I
Inputting Letters and Numbers

p
You can use the remote control to input letters and numbers.
The following tables detail the characters and numbers that can be input. The language that can be input
depends on which language is selected through system settings.
Press the indicated button repeatedly to cycle through the characters and numbers assigned to that button
until the character you want to input is displayed. If you want to input another character using the same button,
press [ ] to move the input cursor to the right.

Input
Table 1 English/Arabic
Latin Mode Extended Character 1 Extended Character 2
Number (Western Europe) Mode (Eastern Europe) Mode
Uppercase Lowercase Uppercase Lowercase Uppercase Lowercase
Button -preferred -preferred Mode
-preferred -preferred -preferred -preferred
Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
AÀÁÂÃÄÅ aàáâãäåæ
ÆBCÇaàá bcçAÀÁÂ
ABCabc2 abcABC2 2
âãäåæbcç ÃÄÅÆBC
2 Ç2
DEFdef 3 defDEF3 3 DEÈÉÊËF deèéêëfD

deèéêëf3 EÈÉÊËF3
GHIghi4 ghiGHI4 4 GHIÍghií4 ghiíGHIÍ4
JKLjkl5 jklJKL5 5 JKLjkl5 jklJKL5
MNÑOÒÓ mnñoòóôõ
ÔÕÖØŒ öøœMNÑ
MNOmno6 mnoMNO6 6
mnñoòóô OÒÓÔÕÖ
õöøœ6 ØŒ6
PQRSpqr pqrsPQR
7
s7 S7
TUVtuv8 tuvTUV8 8
WXYZwxy wxyzWXY 9
z9 Z9
0 Space 0 Space 0 0 Space 0 Space 0 Space 0 Space
.@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= +

<> <> <> <> <> <> <>
#_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\%
~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(),
[]{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}'

Input
Table 2 Spanish
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
AÁBCaáb aábcAÁB ÆBCÇaàá bcçAÀÁÂ
2
c2 C2 âãäåæbcç ÃÄÅÆBC
2 Ç2
DEÉFdeé deéfDEÉ 3 DEÈÉÊËF deèéêëfD
f3 F3 deèéêëf3 EÈÉÊËF3
GHIÍghií4 ghiíGHIÍ4 4 GHIÍghií4 ghiíGHIÍ4
MNÑOÓm mnñoóMN ÔÕÖØŒ öøœMNÑ
6
nñoó6 ÑOÓ6 mnñoòóô OÒÓÔÕÖ
õöøœ6 ØŒ6
PQRSpqr pqrsPQR
7
s7 S7
TUÚÜVtu tuúüvTUÚ
8
úüv8 ÜV8
WXYZwxy wxyzWXY 9
z9 Z9
.@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= +

<> <> <> <> <> <> <>
#_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\%
~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(),
[]{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}'

Input
Table 3 Portuguese
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
AÁÂÃÀBC aáâãàbcç
Çaáâãàbc AÁÂÃÀBC 2
ç2 Ç2
2 Ç2
DEÉÊFde deéêfDEÉ 3 DEÈÉÊËF deèéêëfD
éêf3 ÊF3 deèéêëf3 EÈÉÊËF3
GHIÍghií4 ghiíGHIÍ4 4 GHIÍghií4 ghiíGHIÍ4
MNOÓÔÕ mnoóôõM ÔÕÖØŒ öøœMNÑ
6
mnoóôõ6 NOÓÔÕ6 mnñoòóô OÒÓÔÕÖ
õöøœ6 ØŒ6
PQRSpqr pqrsPQR
7
s7 S7
TUÚÜVtuú tuúüvTUÚ
8
üv8 ÜV8
WXYZwxy wxyzWXY 9
z9 Z9
.@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= +

<> <> <> <> <> <> <>
#_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\%
~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(),
[]{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}'

Input
Table 4 Japanese
Latin Mode (Normal)

Button Katakana Mode Uppercase Lowercase Number Mode
(Full-Width) -preferred Mode -preferred Mode (Normal)
アイウエオァィゥェォ 1 1 1
カキクケコ AB C a b c 2 a b cAB C 2 2
サシスセソ DEFdef 3 defDEF3 3
タチツテトッ GHIghi4 ghiGHI4 4
ナニヌネノ J K Lj k l 5 j k l J K L5 5
ハヒフヘホ MNOmno6 mnoMNO6 6
マミムメモ PQRSpqrs7 pqrsPQRS7 7
ヤユヨャュョ TUVtuv8 tuvTUV8 8
ラリルレロ WXYZwxyz9 wxyzWXYZ9 9
ワヲンヮ−（Full-width space） 0（Normal space） 0（Normal space） 0
゛
（Voicing mark）
.@:;"= +<> .@:;"= +<> .@:;"= +<>
゜
（Half-voicing mark）
#_-&$\%~^!?/` #_-&$\%~^!?/` #_-&$\%~^!?/`

(),[]{|}' (),[]{|}' (),[]{|}'

Input
Table 5 Russian
Cyrillic Mode Latin Mode
Uppercase Lowercase Number Uppercase Lowercase
Button -preferred -preferred Mode -preferred -preferred
Mode Mode Mode Mode
1 1 1 1 1
AÁÂÃÀBCÇ aáâãàbcç
А БВ Га бв г 2 аб в г А Б ВГ 2 2
aáâãàbcç2 AÁÂÃÀBCÇ2
ДЕ ЁЖ З д её ж д е ёж з Д ЕЁ Ж DEÉÊFdeéê deéêfDEÉÊ
3
з3 З3 f3 F3
ИЙ КЛ и й кл 4 и й кл И ЙК Л 4 4 GHIÍghií4 ghiíGHIÍ4
МН О Пм н о п5 м н оп М Н О П5 5 JKLjkl5 jklJKL5
MNOÓÔÕm mnoóôõM
Р С ТУр ст у6 рс ту РС Т У6 6
noóôõ6 NOÓÔÕ6
ФХЦ Чф х цч 7 фхц ч ФХ Ц Ч7 7 PQRSpqrs7 pqrsPQRS7
Ш Щ ЪЫ шщъ шщ ъ ыШ Щ Ъ TUÚÜVtuúü tuúüvTUÚÜ

8
ы8 Ы8 v8 V8
Ь ЭЮ Я ь э ю я 9 ь э ю я ЬЭ Ю Я9 9 WXYZwxy wxyzWXY
z9 Z9
0 Space Ґ ЄІ ЇЎ 0 Space ґ є і їў
0 0 Space 0 Space
ґ є і їў ҐЄІЇЎ
.@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= +
<> <> <> <> <>
#_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\%
~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(),
[]{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}'
Continued on next page

Input
Continued from previous page

Extended Character 1 Extended Character 2
(Western Europe) Mode (Eastern Europe) Mode
Button Uppercase Lowercase Uppercase Lowercase
Mode Mode Mode Mode
1 1 1 1
2 Ç2
DEÈÉÊËF deèéêëfD
GHIÍghií4 ghiíGHIÍ4
JKLjkl5 jklJKL5
ÔÕÖØŒ öøœMNÑ
mnñoòóô OÒÓÔÕÖ
õöøœ6 ØŒ6
0 Space 0 Space 0 Space 0 Space
.@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= +

<> <> <> <>
#_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\%
~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(),
[]{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}'

Input
Table 6 Chinese
Latin Mode
Button Number Mode
Uppercase-preferred Mode Lowercase-preferred Mode
1 1 1
AB C a b c 2 a b cAB C 2 2
DEFdef 3 defDEF3 3
GHIghi4 ghiGHI4 4
JKLjkl5 jklJKL5 5
MNOmno6 mnoMNO6 6
PQ RSpqrs7 pqrsPQ RS7 7
TUVtuv8 tuvT UV8 8
WXYZ wxyz9 wxyzWXYZ 9 9
0 (Normal space) 0 (Normal space) 0
.@:;”= +< > .@:;”= +< > .@:;”= +< >
#_-&$\%~^!?/‘(),[]{|}’ #_-&$\%~^!?/‘(),[]{|}’ #_-&$\%~^!?/‘(),[]{|}’

Input
Table 7 German
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
AÄBCaäb aäbcAÄB ÆBCÇaàá bcçAÀÁÂ
2
2 Ç2
DEFdef 3 defDEF3 3 DEÈÉÊËF deèéêëfD

GHIghi4 ghiGHI4 4 GHIÍghií4 ghiíGHIÍ4
MNOÖmn mnoöMNO 6 ÔÕÖØŒ öøœMNÑ
oö6 Ö6 mnñoòóô OÒÓÔÕÖ
õöøœ6 ØŒ6
PQRSßpq pqrsßPQR
7
rsß7 Sß7
TUÜVtuüv tuüvTUÜV
8
8 8
WXYZwxy wxyzWXY
9
z9 Z9
.@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= +

<> <> <> <> <> <> <>
#_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\%
~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(),
[]{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}'

Input
Table 8 French
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
AÀÂÆBC aàâæbcçA ÆBCÇaàá bcçAÀÁÂ
Çaàâæbc ÀÂÆBCÇ2 2 âãäåæbcç ÃÄÅÆBC
ç2
2 Ç2
DEÈÉÊËF deèéêëfD DEÈÉÊËF deèéêëfD
3
deèéêëf 3 EÈÉÊËF3 deèéêëf3 EÈÉÊËF3
GHIÎÏghiîï ghiîïGHIÎÏ 4 GHIÍghií4 ghiíGHIÍ4

4 4
MNOÔŒ mnoôœM ÔÕÖØŒ öøœMNÑ
6
mnoôœ6 NOÔŒ6 mnñoòóô OÒÓÔÕÖ
õöøœ6 ØŒ6
PQRSpqr pqrsPQR
7
s7 S7
TUÙÛÜVt tuùûüvTU
8
uùûüv8 ÙÛÜV8
WXYZwxy wxyzWXY
9
z9 Z9
.@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= +

<> <> <> <> <> <> <>
#_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\%
~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(),
[]{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}'

Input
Table 9 Italian
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
AÀBCaàb aàbcAÀB ÆBCÇaàá bcçAÀÁÂ
2
2 Ç2
DEÈÉFde deèéfDEÈ 3 DEÈÉÊËF deèéêëfD
èéf 3 ÉF3 deèéêëf3 EÈÉÊËF3
GHIÌghiì4 ghiìGHIÌ4 4 GHIÍghií4 ghiíGHIÍ4
MNOÒÓm mnoòóMN ÔÕÖØŒ öøœMNÑ
6
noòó6 OÒÓ6 mnñoòóô OÒÓÔÕÖ
õöøœ6 ØŒ6
PQRSpqr pqrsPQR
7
s7 S7
TUÙVtuùv tuùvTUÙV
8
8 8
WXYZwxy wxyzWXY 9
z9 Z9
.@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= +

<> <> <> <> <> <> <>
#_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\%
~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(),
[]{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}'

Input
Table 10 Dutch
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
AÁÄBCaá aáäbcAÁÄ 2 ÆBCÇaàá bcçAÀÁÂ
äbc2 BC2 âãäåæbcç ÃÄÅÆBC
2 Ç2
DEÈÉËFd deèéëfDE DEÈÉÊËF deèéêëfD
3
eèéëf 3 ÈÉËF3 deèéêëf3 EÈÉÊËF3
GHIÍÏghiíï ghiíïGHIÍÏ
4 GHIÍghií4 ghiíGHIÍ4
4 4
MNOÓÖm mnoóöMN ÔÕÖØŒ öøœMNÑ
6
noóö6 OÓÖ6 mnñoòóô OÒÓÔÕÖ
õöøœ6 ØŒ6
PQRSpqr pqrsPQR
7
s7 S7
TUÚÜVtuú tuúüvTUÚ
8
üv8 ÜV8
W X IJ Y Z w w x ij y z W X 9
x ij y z 9 IJ Y Z 9
.@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= + .@:;"= +

<> <> <> <> <> <> <>
#_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\% #_-&$\%
~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(), ~^!?/`(),
[]{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}' []{|}'

Input
Switching the Input Mode

Each time [B] or [R] is pressed, the input mode will be switched in the following cycle:
• [B] (When Japanese is selected for the display language): Katakana Mode ® Latin mode ® number
mode
[B] (When a language other than Japanese, Chinese, or Russian is selected for the display
language): Latin mode ® number mode ® extended character 1 mode ® extended character 2 mode
[B] (When Chinese is selected for the display language): Latin mode ® number mode
[B] (When Russian is selected for the display language): Cyrillic mode ® number mode ® Latin mode
® extended character 1 mode ® extended character 2 mode
• [R] (When an input mode other than Katakana mode or number mode is selected):
lowercase-preferred mode ® uppercase-preferred mode
The current input mode is displayed in the guide area.
Example: Latin mode and lowercase-preferred mode currently selected
Deleting an Input Character

Press [Y] to delete an input character. The character deleted depends on the position of the cursor:
• If the cursor is to the right of the last character in the line, the last character will be deleted.
• If the cursor is within a line of characters, the character to the right of the cursor will be deleted.
Inserting Characters
Use [ ][ ] to move the cursor to the position where you want to insert characters, and then begin input. The
characters will be inserted at the location of the cursor.

Additional Information
A
Troubleshooting
d
If a problem is occurring with the operation of the device, check here for possible solutions. Before proceeding
o
check all connections to make sure they are secure, and that power is flowing from the outlet that the unit is
n
plugged into.
a
n
Basic Operation
Problem Cause and Solution
f
The power does not turn on. • The power cord is not plugged into the outlet.
r
→ Plug the power cord into the outlet.

m
t
There is no display. • A cable or cord is not properly connected.
i
→ Check that all cables to the unit are connected properly (Page 23).
o
Perform self diagnosis, and check the performance of the video camera
n
and the display that are connected to the unit (Page 134).
• The main video camera is not turned on.
→ Turn on the main video camera.
• The display is not turned on, or the input that the unit is connected to is
not selected.
→ Turn on the display, and select the input that the unit is connected to.
• The unit is in screen standby mode.
→ Pushing a button on the remote control, or receiving a video conference
call will end standby mode and the display will return.
Note
• The network administrator can set the length of time until the
unit enters screen standby mode (Page 127).
• When connecting a device equipped with HDCP (High-bandwidth
Digital Content Protection), only a blue or blue/black screen may be
displayed.
→ If an image is not correctly displayed, do not connect an
HDCP-equipped device.
The area at the edges of the • The display is not set to show the full image.
screen is not displaying → Set the display to show images at full screen.
properly. • When connecting to an MCU or non-Panasonic video conference
system, the other party’s image may be trimmed, depending on the
device used by the other party.
→ Contact your dealer.
The aspect ratio of the image • When connecting to an MCU or non-Panasonic video conference
is not correct. system, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the other party’s
device may not be displayed correctly, depending on the device used.
→ During a 2-party video conference call, pressing [G] will display the
dialogue box for changing the aspect ratio. Press [ ][ ] to select an
aspect ratio. The dialogue box will disappear after approximately 3
seconds. The changed aspect ratio will return to "Auto" (default) when
the call is ended.

Operation is unresponsive or • Cables or cords may not be connected properly.

incorrect. → Check that all cables to the unit are connected properly (Page 23).
• An error has occurred.
→ Turn off the unit and restart it.
• There may be a problem with your communication lines.
The remote control is • The batteries are depleted.
unresponsive. → Replace with new batteries.
• The remote control is being used out of the signal reception range.
→ Make sure to use the remote control within the signal reception range.
• The remote control ID differs between the unit and the remote control.
• If the batteries in the remote control run out (or if they are taken out of
the remote control), and more than 1 day passes, the remote control’s
ID will be initialised.
→ Change the settings so that the remote control ID of the unit and the
remote control match. Perform the following procedure:
1. Turn off the unit and restart it.
• The Home screen is displayed. Check the remote control ID of
the unit (Page 41).
Note
• If the remote control ID is not displayed on the Home
screen, contact your dealer.
2. Press and hold [·] and [#] at the same time.
3. Within 2 seconds after you release the buttons, press the number
(1 to 3) corresponding to the ID displayed on the Home screen.
Note
• If the remote control is still unresponsive after performing
the procedure above, contact your dealer.
• Cameras that support the remote control through function are set to
receive signals from a remote control.
→ When using the remote control, be sure to point it at the remote control
signal receiver of the camera.
→ If you need to send the remote control signals to the unit, set "Remote
control through function" ("FIX Cam's Remote Ctrl Rcvr" for
software versions lower than 4.50) to "OFF" (Page 131).
• The unit is set to receive signals from a remote control.
→ When using the remote control, be sure to point it at the remote control
signal receiver of the unit (Page 22).
→ If you need to send the remote control signals to the camera, set
"Remote control through function" ("FIX Cam's Remote Ctrl
Rcvr" for software versions lower than 4.50) to "ON" (Page 131).

You cannot control your own • Your video camera is not a video camera supported by this unit.
video camera (main or sub → Use a video camera that is supported by this unit. For details, contact
video camera) with the your dealer.
remote control. • You are trying to use a function that is not supported by your video
camera. For example, you tried to use the pan function with a video
camera that supports only the zoom function.
→ Check whether your video camera supports the function you are trying
to use.
• When you connect both the main video camera and sub video camera
to your unit, you may become unable to control one or both of the video
cameras.
→ Disconnect the HDMI cable of the video camera you cannot control,
and then connect that video camera’s HDMI cable again.
You cannot control the other • The other party’s video camera is not a video camera supported by this
party’s video camera (main or unit.
sub video camera) with the → Ask the other party to use a video camera that is supported by this unit.
remote control. For details, have the other party contact the dealer.
• "CAM ctrl from remote site(s)" is set to "OFF" on the other party’s
unit (Page 131).
→ Ask the other party to set "CAM ctrl from remote site(s)" to "ON" on
their unit.
• You are trying to use a function that is not supported by the other
party’s video camera. For example, you tried to use the pan function
with a video camera that supports only the zoom function.
→ Check whether the other party’s video camera supports the function
you are trying to use.
• When the other party connects both the main video camera and sub
video camera to their unit, you may become unable to control one or
both of their video cameras.
→ Ask the other party to disconnect the HDMI cable of the video camera
you cannot control, and then connect that video camera’s HDMI cable
again.
• One of the parties is using a unit with an incompatible software version.
→ Check the software version of all parties. Update the unit so that the
versions match.
• The other party is using a non-Panasonic video conference system.
→ If the other party uses a non-Panasonic video conference system, some
operations may not be possible or some operations may not function
as expected.
• Your own site is a Sub Site in a multiple-party video conference call
using a built-in MCU, and so you are not permitted to control the other
party’s video camera.
→ Set "Camera control transmitting" of "MCU Settings" to "ON".

Cannot connect with another • The LAN cable for LAN1 or LAN2 (KX-VC1600/KX-VC2000) is not
party. connected properly.
→ Check that it is connected to the unit properly (Page 23). Perform a
network test by entering the IP address of the other party, and then
confirm the connection to the other party (Page 134).
• The routing information is incorrect.
→ Confirm your network and routing settings, and then contact your
administrator.
• The maximum bandwidth setting is incorrect.
→ If you are trying to connect to a non-Panasonic video conference
system, a connection might not be possible depending on either your
or the other party’s bandwidth settings. Either check your settings and
change them, or have the other party do the same (Page 122).
• The call type setting is incorrect.
→ Set the call type setting so that it is the same as the other party’s
(Page 143).
• The SIP settings are incorrect.
→ Check the SIP settings (Page 144). After you check the SIP settings, if
you still cannot connect to the other party, contact your network
administrator.
• The ID and password for digest authentication are incorrect.
→ Check that the values specified for "Authentication ID" and
"Authentication Password" are correct (Page 144).
• The "SIP Transport Protocol" setting is different from the other
party’s.
→ Set the "SIP Transport Protocol" setting so that it is the same as the
other party’s (Page 144).
• The local site selection is incorrect.
→ Confirm the local site. Select the local site that is appropriate for your
usage environment (Page 113).
• The IP address is not entered correctly.
→ Confirm that the other party’s IP address is correctly entered.
• The SIP URI (or SIP user name), H.323 extension, or H.323 name is
not entered correctly.
→ Check whether the SIP URI (or SIP user name), H.323 extension, or H.
323 name of the other party is entered correctly or whether it conforms
to the relevant standard.
• The MCU’s conference room number@IP address is not entered
correctly.
→ Check whether the conference room number and IP address of the
MCU is entered correctly.

• When making a video conference call by entering an MCU’s conference

room number@IP address, "SIP Server" or "Gatekeeper" is set to
"ON".
→ Change the "SIP Server" and "Gatekeeper" settings to "OFF"
(Page 144, Page 145).
• The Internet connection is not established.
→ Some hubs, routers, etc. can take 10 seconds or more to establish an
Internet connection.
• You are trying to make a video conference call by connecting to an MCU
or non-Panasonic video conference system.
→ When connecting to an MCU or non-Panasonic video conference
system, encryption may not be available or some operations may not
function as expected, depending on the device used by the other party.
In this case, contact your dealer.
• You are trying to connect to an MCU or non-Panasonic video
conference system that is not compatible.
→ Use the outgoing call history to confirm the name of the device, and
then contact your dealer.
• The host name is not being resolved to the correct IP address.
→ Check the settings for "DNS Server" or "Primary DNS Server" in
network settings (Page 118).
• The IP address set for LAN1 and IP address set for LAN2 may be using
the same network address (KX-VC1600/KX-VC2000).
→ Check the IP addresses set for LAN1 and LAN2 in the Unit Information
on the Home screen (Page 41). If the addresses are using the same
network address, contact your network administrator.
• When "Auto (SLAAC)" is selected for "IPv6 Address (LAN 1)"
(setting), the IP address and default gateway will not be set.
→ The router is not connected.
→ The router is not correctly configured. Contact your network
administrator. (Set the prefix length distributed by the router to be 64.
When the prefix length is set to a value other than 64, IPv6 addresses
cannot be registered.)
• When "Auto (DHCP)" is selected for "IPv6 Address (LAN 1)"
(setting), the IP address and default gateway will not be set.
→ The DHCPv6 server or router is not connected.
→ The DHCPv6 server is not correctly configured. Contact your network
administrator. (Set the address to be distributed by the DHCPv6 to be
the global address. When the distributed address is not the global
address, IPv6 addresses cannot be registered.)

The image is distorted. • The settings of the hub or router are different to those of the unit.
• Packet loss is occurring. (The network is congested.)
→ Check the display of the network status indication (Page 45). If the icon
shows only 0–1 bars continuously, press [STATUS] twice and check
the fields "Loss" and "Bandwidth", then contact your network
administrator or dealer (Page 104).
• The maximum bandwidth setting is incorrect.
→ For multiple-party video conference calls, each site requires at least
256 kbps of bandwidth. For "Max. Bandwidth", set a value equal to or
greater than (256 kbps ´ the number of site connections) (Page 122).
→ If you are trying to connect to an MCU or non-Panasonic video
conference system, depending on the other party’s device, the image
may be distorted due to lack of bandwidth. In this case, contact your
dealer.
The maximum bandwidth • The maximum bandwidth during a video conference call adjusts to that
changes during a video of the party that has set the lowest bandwidth for the maximum
conference call. bandwidth setting among all participating parties.
→ If there is a problem with your communication lines, contact your dealer.
The computer or sub video • Cables or cords may not be connected properly.
camera’s video is not → Make sure all connections to the unit are correct (Page 89). On the
displayed. Home screen, press [PC] or [CAMERA SUB] and then check the
computer’s screen or sub video camera’s image.
• The computer’s display resolution is incompatible with the unit.
→ Set your computer’s resolution to a setting compatible with the unit
(Page 89).

Audio
The other party cannot hear • The microphone cable is not properly connected.
your voice. → Check that the microphone is properly connected to the unit (Page 23).
Perform self diagnosis, and check the performance of the microphones
that are connected to the unit (Page 134).
• The microphone is muted.
→ Press [MIC MUTE] on the remote control, or press the MIC Mute button
on the Boundary Microphone to unmute the microphone (Page 86).
• "Default MIC Mute set (Make Call)" is set to "ON".
• "Default MIC Mute set (Incoming)" is set to "ON".
→ The microphone is muted at the time when communication starts.
Confirm the settings (Page 122).
• The microphone is being obstructed.
→ During the video conference call, do not block the microphone with your
hand or other object.
• You are too far from a microphone.
→ Speak close to a microphone.
• More than 5 Digital Boundary Microphones are connected in cascade.
→ Connect no more than 4 Digital Boundary Microphones at a time.
• A headset is connected.
→ When a headset is connected, audio input from Boundary Microphones
is disabled. To use the Boundary Microphones, disconnect the headset.
The sound cuts out. • You are too far from a microphone.
→ Speak close to a microphone.
• The microphone or unit is being moved during a video conference call.
→ Do not move the unit or the microphone during a video conference call.
• The microphone is being obstructed.
→ During the video conference call, do not block the microphone with your
hand or other object.

The sound volume is low or • The unit’s volume settings are too low.
cannot be heard at all. → Increase the volume level (Page 85).
Note
• You can set the volume level of a video conference call before
starting the call. Confirm the settings (Page 128).
• The other party’s microphone has been muted.
→ Have the other party unmute their microphone.
• The display’s volume settings are too low.
→ Increase the volume level of the display.
• A headset is connected.
→ When a headset is connected, audio output from the display or
speakers is disabled. Disconnect the headset.
• The "Other Site's Audio" setting of a profile's setup or "Other Site's
Audio" in the communication menu is set to "Mix (Selection)", and
"Audio Mixing Site" is not set.
→ Set "Audio Mixing Site" in the profile setup or the communication
menu (Page 82, Page 110).
You hear audio feedback. • The microphone is too close to the display or to speakers.
→ Keep microphones at least 1 m away from any display or speaker.
• The display’s volume settings are too high.
→ Decrease the volume level of the display.
Sound cuts out or echoes. • Adjustments to the environment immediately after a video conference
call has begun may not yet have completed.
→ Immediately after a video conference call has begun, be sure to speak
in turn with other parties. The unit will automatically adjust audio levels
so that all parties can easily be heard.
The other party hears noise. • The Boundary Microphone cable is not properly connected.
→ Check that the Boundary Microphone is properly connected to the unit
(Page 30).
The orientation of the image • The speakers are not properly positioned.
and sound do not match (the → Position speakers on either side of the display and check that the left/
voice of a person on a side of right wiring is correct. If you place the display at the front of the room
the screen comes from the and the speakers at the back, the microphone’s left/right spatial
opposite side’s speaker, etc.). direction may be reversed, and the orientation of the image and sound
will not match.
• The speakers of the other party are not properly positioned.
→ Ask the other party to position speakers on either side of the display.
When the MIC position is set automatically, if the other party places the
display at the front of the room and the speakers at the back, the
microphone’s left/right spatial direction may be reversed, and the
orientation of the image and sound will not match.
• The MIC positions set manually by the other party are incorrect.
→ Ask the other party to confirm the manual settings of their MIC positions.
When setting the MIC position manually, the left/right orientation should
match the left/right channels as viewed from the side of the main video
camera. When the MIC position is set to "Center stereo", make sure
that it is placed with its connector facing the display (Page 128).

System Settings
The settings of the unit cannot • A video conference call is in progress.

be changed. → Make settings after ending the current video conference call.
• A video conference call is incoming.
→ A dialogue box will be displayed asking whether to answer the call.
Press [END] to disconnect the incoming call, and then configure the
setting on the unit.
→ If a video conference call is received when editing settings on the unit,
a dialogue box will be displayed asking whether to answer the call
without saving the settings, and you will temporarily be unable to edit
the settings. To continue editing, reject the call.
If These Messages Appear

Message Cause and Solution
Call failed. Encryption • The encryption settings do not match those of the other party in a video
settings (On/Off) must match. conference call.
Please change the encryption → Change the encryption settings to match those of the other party
setting on one side and try (Page 123, Page 123, Page 140).
again.
Call Failed due to wrong • The encryption key settings do not match those of the other party in a
encryption key. Please video conference call.
contact your installer. → Ensure your encryption key setting matches the other party’s
(Page 141).
Check the Main Camera • A cable or cord is not properly connected.
connection. → Check that all cables to the unit are connected properly (Page 23).
• The signal input from the main video camera is invalid.
→ A valid signal cannot be received from the connected main video
camera. Contact your dealer.
Unable to register, the • The contact list has reached its maximum capacity.
contact list is full. → Delete unneeded contacts (Page 106).
Invalid IP Address. • The format of the IP address that you entered is invalid.
→ Enter the IPv4 address correctly, in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
(decimal values separated by periods). For values of only 1 or 2 digits,
enter these numbers as they are. Do not enter like [.001].
– Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001]
Multicast or broadcast addresses cannot be used.
→ Enter a valid IPv6 address. For the IPv6 address input format, refer to
Page 47.

Invalid Subnet mask. • The input subnet mask is invalid.

→ Enter a valid subnet mask. For values of only 1 or 2 digits, enter these
numbers as they are. Do not enter like [.000].
Example: The subnet mask is [255.255.255.0].
– Correct entry: [255.255.255.0]
– Wrong entry: [255.255.255.000]
Invalid Default Gateway. • The input default gateway is invalid.
→ Enter a valid default gateway for IPv4 addresses. For values of only 1
or 2 digits, enter these numbers as they are. Do not enter like [.001].
Example: The default gateway is [192.168.0.1].
– Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001]
→ Enter a valid default gateway for IPv6 addresses. For the IPv6 address
input format, refer to Page 47.
Invalid Date/Time. • Enter a date within the valid parameters.
→ Enter a date between January 1, 2017 and December 31, 2035.
PC is not connected. • A cable or cord is not properly connected.
Check the connection. → Check that all cables to the unit are connected properly (Page 34).
• The computer is not turned on.
→ Turn on the computer.
• The computer is not set to output from its external monitor video out
port.
→ Change the computer’s settings so that video is output from the external
monitor port.
Sub-Camera is not • A cable or cord is not properly connected.
connected. → Check that all cables to the unit are connected properly (Page 34).
Check the connection. • The sub video camera is not turned on.
→ Turn on the sub video camera.
Sub-Camera source is not • A cable or cord is not properly connected.
compatible. → Check that all cables to the unit are connected properly (Page 34).
• The signal input from the sub video camera is invalid.
→ A valid signal cannot be received from the connected sub video camera.
Contact your dealer.
Different video frequency or • A display with a video frequency different from that of the unit was
resolution of TV is connected.
connected with HDMI n. → Match the unit’s video frequency to the display being used.
• A display that does not support 1920 ´ 1080 resolution was connected.
Note
→ Use a display that supports 1080 resolution.
• "n" is displayed as the
HDMI terminal’s Note
number (1 to 3). • The resolution of all connected displays will be lowered. When the
terminal connected to the display indicated in the message is
disconnected, the resolution will return to full HD.
• The output for the terminal indicated in the message will display as
"Unsupported" in the unit information screen.

Check display resolution. • The computer’s display resolution is incompatible with the unit.

→ Set your computer’s resolution to a setting compatible with the unit
(Page 89).
n is already in use. • On the network you are using, another device is already using the IP
address you have input for the unit.
Note
→ Make sure that all devices on the network have unique IP addresses
• The IP address is assigned.
represented by n.
Cooling Fan Malfunction. • The CPU cooling fan within the device has stopped (displayed for
Please turn off the system models except the KX-VC2000).
and call for service. → Quickly turn off the power. Contact your dealer.
Cooling Fan Malfunction. • The CPU cooling fan within the device has stopped (displayed for the
Power automatically turns KX-VC2000).
off. → Contact your dealer.
Call Failed due to • An unsupported feature was used.
unsupported product or → Check the software version of all parties. Update the unit so that the
other error. versions match.
For details about supported versions and features, contact your dealer.
• Connection to an unsupported MCU or non-Panasonic video
conference system was attempted.
→ For details about supported MCUs and non-Panasonic video
conference systems, contact your dealer.
Call disconnected due to • The other party’s device uses an unsupported codec.
codec negotiation failed. → Have the other party check their settings.

Received remote control ID • The remote control IDs of the unit and remote control do not match.
(n1). The unit current setting → Follow the on-screen instructions to change the remote control ID of the
is (n2). remote control to match that of the unit.
Press [Home] button using → If you cannot change the remote control ID of the remote control,
the correct remote control, or contact your dealer.
setup remote control as → If multiple remote controls with assigned IDs will be used close together
follows. or if you do not want this message to be displayed, select "OFF" for
1. Press [.] and [#] at the same "Check ID mismatch" (Page 130).
time.
2. Within 2 seconds, press
[n2].
3. Press [Home] to finish, this
message will disappear.
If this message will not

disappear, please check the
batteries in your remote
control and try again.
Note
• The remote control ID
of the remote control
(1/2/3) is represented
by n1.
• The remote control ID
of the unit (1/2/3) is
represented by n2.
The address is invalid. • The IP address contains an invalid value.
→ Enter the IPv4 address correctly. The correct format is
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX (dotted format decimal notation).
If the IPv4 address contains 1 or 2 digit numbers, enter these numbers
as they are. Do not enter like [.001].
– Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001]
Page 47.
→ When making a call by specifying an IPv6 address port number,
enclose the IPv6 address in square brackets as shown below.
[2001:db8::10]:5060
• The address information contains an invalid value.
→ Enter the information correctly (Page 47).
Cannot transmit to the local • The IP address of the other party is the same as your own IP address.
site.
Check the address. → Register the correct IP address.
Calling the same site. • In a multiple-party video conference call, one or more of the parties is
Check the address. using the same IP address.
→ Register the correct IP address.

Invalid Primary DNS Server • The IP address contains an invalid value.

address. → Enter the IPv4 address correctly. The correct format is
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX (dotted format decimal notation).
If the IPv4 address contains 1 or 2 digit numbers, enter these numbers
Invalid Secondary DNS as they are. Do not enter like [.001].
Server address. Example: The IP address is [192.168.0.1].
– Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001]
Please enter different • The addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers are the
addresses for each DNS same.
Server. → Enter different IP addresses (Page 119).
Invalid Primary • The format of the IP address that you entered is invalid.
DNS Server address (IPv6). → Enter a valid IPv6 address. For the IPv6 address input format, refer to
Invalid Secondary Page 47.
DNS Server address (IPv6).
Please enter different • The addresses of the IPv6 primary DNS server and IPv6 secondary
addresses DNS server are the same.
for each DNS Server (IPv6). → Enter different IPv6 addresses (Page 120).
Connection will be closed in • The time set for "Call Limit time" has one minute remaining
n seconds. (Page 123).
Press "YES" to continue. → If you select "Yes", you can extend the call limit time for the amount
set for "Call Limit time". If you select "No", the call is disconnected.
Note
• The message first
appears when one
minute remains and
"60" is displayed for
n. Then, the
remaining time starts
to decrease.
Unable to connect to • The LAN cable is not connected properly, and therefore you cannot
network. (XXXX XXXX) make a video conference call.
→ Check that the LAN cable is connected to the unit properly. Try making
Note
a call again, after confirming that the IP address, SIP user name, etc.,
• An error code is displayed on the Home screen. If transmission still fails, make a note
(consisting of of the error code and contact your dealer.
numerals) is
displayed in "XXXX Note
XXXX". • If transmission fails due to the LAN cable not being connected
properly, it may take up to 10 minutes before the IP address, SIP
user name, etc., is displayed and video conference calls can be
made after reconnecting the LAN cable.

Disconnected. • When connecting to an MCU or non-Panasonic video conference

system, the video conference call was disconnected.
→ When connecting to an MCU or non-Panasonic video conference
system, encryption may not be available or some operations may not
function as expected, depending on the device used by the other party.
In this case, contact your dealer.
• When connecting to an MCU or non-Panasonic video conference
system, the video conference call was disconnected for an unknown
reason.
→ Wait a while and then try making the video conference call again. If
video conference calls get disconnected repeatedly, contact your
dealer.
Feature is not available with • The other party cannot display the computer’s screen because their
current connection. display does not support the selected resolution.
→ Change the resolution setting to a resolution that is supported by the
other party.
→ Contact your network administrator.
• Tone signals could not be sent because the other party’s device does
not support tone signals.
→ Ask the other party to check their configuration.
Invalid Operation. • Your video camera is not a video camera supported by this unit.
→ Use a video camera that is supported by this unit. For details, contact
your dealer.
• You are trying to use a function that is not supported by your video
camera. For example, you tried to use the pan function with a video
camera that supports only the zoom function.
→ Check whether your video camera supports the function you are trying
to use.
• You are trying to change the call type during a video conference call
using the selected local site.
→ Stop the video conference call using the selected local site, and then
change the call type.
Invalid SIP Server Address. • The format of the SIP server address that you entered is invalid.
→ Enter the SIP server address for IPv4 addresses correctly. Enter the
SIP server address as XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX (values separated by
decimals). For values of only 1 or 2 digits, enter these numbers as they
are. Do not enter like [.001].
– Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001]
Page 47.
Invalid SIP Domain Name. • The format of the SIP domain name that you entered is invalid.
→ Enter a standards-compliant value. For details, contact your network
administrator.

Invalid WAN IP Address. • The format of the router’s WAN IP address that you entered is invalid.
→ Enter the WAN IP address correctly, in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
(decimal values separated by periods). For values of only 1 or 2 digits,
enter these numbers as they are. Do not enter like [.001].
– Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001]
Invalid Gatekeeper Address. • The format of the gatekeeper’s IP address that you entered is invalid.
→ Enter the gatekeeper address for IPv4 addresses correctly. Enter the
gatekeeper address as XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX (values separated by
decimals). For values of only 1 or 2 digits, enter these numbers as they
are. Do not enter like [.001].
– Wrong entry: [192.168.000.001]
Page 47.
Failed to save data. • You are using a USB memory device that is not compatible with the
unit.
→ Use a USB memory device compatible with the unit (Page 156).
• There is not enough free space on the USB memory device you are
using.
→ Confirm the USB memory device has sufficient free space (at least
50 MB) before using it.
Invalid Operation. Initial • In local site settings, you tried to select and save a connection mode
setting is not completed. without completing network settings.
→ Before making local site settings, change the connection mode
(Page 142) and make network settings (Page 118).
Network error has occurred. • A problem has occurred on the network such as a network loop.
Check the network. (LANn) → Check the LAN cables and network equipment. If it has been detected
that the network problem has resolved, the following messages are
Note
displayed. In this case press [ENTER].
• The LAN number (1 or The network is normal.
2) is displayed where Press [ENTER] and restart the system.
"n" is.
System Error! Please restart • The unit’s internal software failed to start up.
the system. If error message • The unit failed to write data to the internal flash memory.
appears again, please → If the unit does not restart automatically after 20 seconds, restart the
contact Installer or Service unit by turning off its power, then turning it back on. If the same message
Administrator. * System may is displayed after resetting the unit, contact your dealer.
restart automatically.
Failed to obtain the WAN IP • There was an error in receiving the WAN address from the external
Address. server.

Software update failed. • The USB memory device does not contain the appropriate firmware.
(3996 0BBB) • The firmware is incorrect.
Software update failed. → Confirm that the correct firmware is saved to the USB memory device.
(3996 0BBB) For details about the firmware, contact your dealer.
Restart the system.
Administrative rights are • The operation has been restricted in the administrator menu.
required for this operation. → Contact your network administrator.
Invalid Operation. • A menu option that cannot be executed is selected.
This site is not an MCU site. → During a one-to-one connection video conference, operations for a
multiple-party video conference call cannot be performed.
Invalid Operation. • A menu option that cannot be executed is selected.
Content is being shared. → When contents are being shared using single-stream communication
during a multiple-party video conference call using a built-in MCU, at
the Main Site the communication menu items "Make a call" and "Main
Position set." cannot be selected.
Invalid Operation. • An operation or menu option that cannot be executed during USB
USB recording is in progress. recording is selected.
→ Operate after stopping USB recording.
There is a problem with the • An error has occurred when writing the recording data.
USB → The write speed of a USB memory device may decline due to
flash drive write speed. deterioration over use in long periods or other causes. Replace the USB
Replace the USB flash drive. memory device. If you continue recording without replacing the USB
memory device, recorded images may be corrupted or cut out.
Invalid Operation. • There is insufficient free space in the connected USB memory device.
Not enough free space on → Connect a USB memory device with sufficient free space according to
USB your required recording time and quality. For the required amount of
flash drive. free space of different qualities, refer to Page 184.
Invalid Operation. • You cannot make or receive calls or use a USB memory device while
The device is in USB Device in USB Device Mode.
Mode. → Set "USB Device Mode" to "OFF" (Page 133).
Invalid Operation. • A menu option that cannot be executed unless the feature is enhanced
The function needs activation. is selected.
→ Confirm the required activation key (Page 20) and refer to
"Enhancement" (Page 158) to enhance the feature. For details,
Registration Page of KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service

Basic Operation
The language displayed on • The language setting is incorrect.

the screen is a foreign → In the upper right of the login screen, select your preferred language
language. from the drop-down list (Page 166).

I cannot log in to the device • The characters displayed in the image were not entered correctly.
application screen. → Check that the capitalization of characters is correct, and then try
entering them again.
→ Check that you have not entered any unused characters, and then try
entering them again. The following characters are not used.
– Uppercase letters: I O
– Lowercase letters: c i j l o s u v w x z
If These Messages Appear

Invalid Activation Key • The Activation Key No. or the Registration ID you entered is incorrect.
entered. → Check the information written on the activation key to ensure it is
entered correctly.
Activation Key already • The Activation Key No. and Registration ID you entered is already in
registered. use by another HD Visual Communication Unit.
• You entered an Activation Key No. and Registration ID that have been
used for registration in the past.
→ Enter the information written on an activation key that has not been
used yet. If the message still appears, contact your dealer.
This Trial licence already • You are trying to use a different activation key after completing
registered. registration using the included activation key.
→ Do not use an activation key other than the one included with the
product.
KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service for this Device

I registered a Registration • The connection mode is not set to "NAT Traversal Mode".
Key, but I cannot make a → Set the connection mode to "NAT Traversal Mode" (Page 142).
video conference call using
KX-VC Series NAT Traversal
Service.
After registering a • The LAN cable is not connected correctly.
Registration Key and → Check that it is connected to the unit properly.
restarting the unit, the • Router settings for your Internet connection are incorrect.
Terminal ID is not displayed in → Set your router correctly, following the router’s documentation, and in
the upper right of the Home accordance with setting information supplied by your Internet provider.
screen even after 5 minutes. • Packet filtering or port forwarding is enabled on the router.
→ Disable these features on the router. For details, refer to your router’s
documentation.

I extended the service period, • You did not restart the unit after registering on the KX-VC Series NAT
but the Terminal ID is not Traversal Service registration page. Restarting the unit is necessary to
displayed on the Home apply the registration information.
screen. → Turn off power to the unit, and then turn it back on to restart the unit.
The service period has not • You did not restart the unit after registering on the KX-VC Series NAT
been extended even though a Traversal Service registration page. Restarting the unit is necessary to
service period extension was apply the registration information.
performed. → Turn off power to the unit, and then turn it back on to restart the unit.
If a message from the KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service is

displayed
Failed Registration Key • You are trying to register an invalid Registration Key.

code authentication. → Recheck the information of the Registration Key that was issued
(Page 167), then repeat the registration (Page 158).
Unable to connect to • The router or the LAN cable is not connected correctly to the unit, and
network. (XXXX XXXX) therefore you cannot make a video conference call. The following table
explains the error codes:
Note
• An error code Error Code Explanation
(containing 10000001 Registration to the gate keeper failed.
alphanumeric
characters) is 01000003 The DHCP lease expired.
displayed in "XXXX
01000006 There was a change due to an extension
XXXX".
of the DHCP lease.
01000007 The DHCP network information is invalid.
05000008 Registration to the SIP server failed.
05000009 TCP connection was lost in NAT

Traversal Mode.
→ Check that the router and/or LAN cable are correctly connected to the
unit. (Directly connect the router to the unit and check operation. Also
try replacing the LAN cable, and then check operation.) If the devices
are connected correctly, the router’s settings may be incorrect, or the
unit may be malfunctioning. Contact your dealer.
Note
• When transmission between the unit and the router is interrupted
because the LAN cable is connected incorrectly, it may take up to
10 minutes before the Terminal ID is displayed and video
conference calls can be made after reconnecting the LAN cable.

Service will expire soon! • Your service period may have passed 3 months.

Please purchase and → Purchase a new activation key, and extend the service period
register new Activation Key (Page 168).
Card to avoid interruption of
NAT Traversal Service.
Expiration date could be
checked at Enhancement
screen.
Service expired! Please • The service period has expired.
purchase and register new → If within 6 months since expiration:
Activation Key Card to Purchase a new activation key, and extend the service period
activate NAT Traversal (Page 168).
Service. → If 6 months or more since expiration:
Purchase a new activation key, and then acquire a new Registration
Key, and re-register to the unit (Page 158, Page 165).
Note
• To determine whether it has been more than 6 months since the
service period expired, see "Checking Enhanced Features".
Due to server issues, the • An error has occurred on the NAT Traversal Service server.
NAT Traversal Service is → Wait a while, and then try connecting again. If you still cannot connect,
temporarily unavailable. We contact your dealer.
are very sorry for any
inconvenience.

Specifications
S
System Specifications
e
Unit KX-VC2000 KX-VC1600 KX-VC1300 KX-VC1000

f
Communication Protocol SIP, H.323

a
t
Video Compression Method H.261 (Main Stream only), H.263, H.263+, H.263++ (reception only),
i
H.264 High Profile, H.264 Baseline Profile
Audio Compression Method G.711 µ-law, A-law (3.4 kHz@64 kbps)
o
G.722 (7.0 kHz@64 kbps)

n
G.722.1 (7.0 kHz@32 kbps)

s
G.722.1 Annex C (14.0 kHz@48 kbps/24 kbps)

MPEG-4 AAC-LD Mono (7.0 kHz@32 kbps, 14.0 kHz@64 kbps,
22.0 kHz@96 kbps)
MPEG-4 AAC-LD Stereo (14.0 kHz@64 kbps, 22.0 kHz@96 kbps)
No. of Channels:
G.711/G.722/G.722.1/G.722.1 Annex C: 1
MPEG-4 AAC-LD Mono: 1/MPEG-4 AAC-LD Stereo: 2
Remote Camera Control H.224, H.281 (Zoom/Pan/Tilt/Preset)
Dual Method H.239 (H.323), BFCP (SIP)
Stream
No. of Displays 3 displays 2 displays 1 display
(Expandable
to 2 displays)
Supported Main: Maximum 1080p 30 frames/sec.
Resolution and Sub: 1080p 30 frames/sec.
Frame Rate
Encryption SRTP (AES 128-bit), H.235 (AES 128-bit)
Other H.460
Communication Bandwidth 256 kbps– 256 kbps–18 Mbps
24 Mbps
Video Compatible 176 ´ 144p, 352 ´ 240p, 352 ´ 288p, 512 ´ 288p, 640 ´ 480p,
Resolutions*1 704 ´ 480p, 704 ´ 576p, 768 ´ 432p, 800 ´ 600p, 1024 ´ 768p,
1280 ´ 720p, 1280 ´ 768p, 1280 ´ 800p, 1920 ´ 1080p
Frame Rate Maximum 60 frames/sec. (When using H.264 1080p)
Screen Display Full screen, Picture in Picture, Picture with Picture, Side by Side
Audio Echo Canceller, Auto Gain Control, Stationary Noise Reduction, Lip
Sync, Equalizer, Mic Mute

Specifications
Input/ Video Camera* HDMI Main ´ 1, HDMI Sub ´ 1

Output Input 2
Input Resolution: 1280 ´ 720p, 1920 ´ 1080i, 1920 ´ 1080p
Terminals
PC RGB ´ 1 (Mini D-sub 15pin), HDMI ´ 1*2
Input Resolution: VGA, SVGA, XGA, HD, WXGA, SXGA, FWXGA,
WXGA+, WXGA++, UXGA, WSXGA+, Full HD
Video Output HDMI ´ 2 HDMI ´ 1
(Expandable
to 2)
Supported HDMI output resolutions: 1920 ´ 1080i, 1920 ´ 1080p
RCA ´ 1 (Component)
HDMI ´ 1 (For own site/recording — —
video)
Audio Input Boundary Microphone (Digital Interface Type) ´ 1
—
(KX-VCA001) (Up to 4)
Boundary Microphone (Analogue Interface Type) ´ 1 (KX-VCA002)
(Up to 1)
HDMI
Stereo mini-plug*3 ´ 1 (ø3.5 mm)
RCA ´ 1 (Stereo)
Audio Outputs HDMI*4
Stereo mini-plug*3 ´ 1 (ø3.5 mm)
RCA ´ 1 (Stereo)
Network RJ45 ´ 2 RJ45 ´ 2 RJ45 ´ 1 (100BASE-TX Full
(1000BASE-T (100BASE-TX Duplex)
Full Duplex) Full Duplex)
External Controller RS-232C ´ 1 (Also used for maintenance)
Other USB 2.0 ´ 1 (Host Mode, Device Mode) , Camera Control
terminal ´ 1 (Not used)
No. of Simultaneous Connections 16 6 (Expandable 4 2 (Expandable
(Expandable to 10) to 4)
to 24)
Contents Sharing PC (RGB/HDMI), Sub video camera (HDMI Sub)
USB Host Mode (USB Memory Updating Software, Import (Contact List/Profile*5/Configuration Data/
Device) Encryption Data/Startup screen/Multicast Tree List), Export (Contact
List/Profile*5/Configuration Data/Encryption Data/Multicast Tree List),
Recording
USB Device Mode USB Video Class: Version 1.0
USB Audio Class: Version 1.0
Network Protocol TCP/IPv4, TCP/IPv6*6, UDP/IPv4, UDP/IPv6*6, DHCP, DNS, HTTP,
HTTPS, TELNET, NTP
Network Functions Packet resending (ARQ), Forward Error Correction (FEC), Adaptive
Rate Control (ARC), Reorder, Packet Shaping, Arbitrary port setting,
NAT support, encryption, IP Precedence/DiffServ support

Specifications
External Control Control via web browser/HTTP CGI, TELNET, RS-232C

Connection Mode IP mode, NAT Traversal mode, IP / NAT Traversal Mode
Dimensions Approx. Approx. 320 mm ´ approx. 230 mm ´ approx.
(width ´ depth ´ height) 320 mm ´ 61 mm (excluding projecting parts)
approx. (approx. 12 in ´ approx. 9 in ´ approx. 2.4 in)
270 mm ´
approx. 61 mm
(excluding
projecting
parts)
(approx. 12 in
´ approx. 10 in
´ approx.
2.4 in)
Weight Approx. 3.4 kg Approx. 2.0 kg (approx. 4.4 lb)
(approx. 7.5 lb)
Power Input AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz
up to 1.0 A up to 1.4 A
Power Consumption Maximum: Maximum: Maximum: Maximum:
73 W, In 45 W, In 43 W, In 37 W, In
standby: 0.6 W standby: 0.6 W standby: 0.6 W standby: 0.6 W
DC Power Input DC 24 V, 3.0 A DC 24 V, 2.5 A
Operating Temperature 0 °C–40 °C (32 °F–104 °F)

Operating Humidity 10 %–90 % (non-condensing)
*1
Varies according to device settings and the status of the network.
*2
HDCP is not supported.
*3
For 3-conductor stereo mini-plugs only.
*4
Simultaneous voice audio output for HDMI1/HDMI2 is not supported.
*5
Available for the KX-VC1000 after KX-VCS314 expansion has been enabled.
*6
Some features are not supported when using IPv6.

Index
Index
Device Connection 29
E
A Encryption, setting 140
Activating Enhanced Features 158
Activation Key 20 F
Activation Key for 4 Point Built-in MCU (KX-VCS304) 20 For Your Safety 11
Activation Key for 4 Point Built-in MCU (KX-VCS305) 20
Activation Key for 4 Point Built-in MCU (KX-VCS314) 20
Activation Key for HDMI Dual Monitor (KX-VCS402) 20 G
Activation Key for Mobile Connection (KX-VCS351) 20 GUI, setting 153
Activation Key for Mobile Connection (KX-VCS352) 20
Activation Key for Multicast (KX-VCS302) 20
Activation Key for NAT Traversal 1 Year (KX-VCS701) 20 H
Activation Key for NAT Traversal 3 Years (KX-VCS703) 20 Headset 34
Activation Key for PC Peripheral (KX-VCZ501) 20
Administrator Password, setting 140
Amplifier/Speaker 35 I
Answering a Video Conference Call 63 Initial Settings 48
Answering, Automatic 64 Inputting Letters and Numbers 190
Answering, Forced 64
Answering, Manual 63 K
KX-VCS302 (Activation Key for Multicast) 20
B KX-VCS304 (Activation Key for 4 Point Built-in MCU) 20
Batteries, changing (remote control) 188 KX-VCS305 (Activation Key for 4 Point Built-in MCU) 20
Boundary Microphone 19 KX-VCS314 (Activation Key for 4 Point Built-in MCU) 20
Boundary Microphone (Analogue Interface Type) 19, 30 KX-VCS351 (Activation Key for Mobile Connection) 20
Boundary Microphone (Digital Interface Type) 19, 30 KX-VCS352 (Activation Key for Mobile Connection) 20
Buttons KX-VCS402 (Activation Key for HDMI Dual Monitor) 20
Power 22 KX-VCS701 (Activation Key for NAT Traversal 1 Year) 20
Remote Control 25 KX-VCS703 (Activation Key for NAT Traversal 3 Years) 20
KX-VCZ501 (Activation Key for PC Peripheral) 20
C
Cables 29 L
Call Type, setting 143 Language, setting 131
Calling by Entering an Address Directly 56 LED Patterns 27
Calling from the Call History 59 Local Site, setting 113
Calling from the Contact List 52
Calling using One-Touch Connection Numbers 51 M
Calling using Profile 54
Main Site 3
Cleaning the unit 189
Making a Video Conference Call 51
Codec, setting 147
Making H.323 Settings 145
Computer 34
Making SIP Settings 144
Computer Screen and Sub Video Camera, viewing 89
MIC Position, setting 128
Confirming the MPR ID 158
Muting the Microphone 86
Connecting to an MCU 65
Connection
Amplifier/Active Speaker 35 N
Computer 34 Network Test, performing 134
Sub Video Camera 34 Network, setting 118
Connection Status, viewing 103 Noise reduction 88
Connection, setting 121
Contacts, adding 105
Contacts, deleting 106 O
Contacts, editing 106 Optional Accessory 18
Controlling a Video Camera 92
P
D Part Names and Usage 22
Date and Time, setting 118 Ports, Main Unit 23

Index
Power Button 22
Power Management Settings 154
Privacy 14
Protecting Information 14
R
Registering the Registration Key 158
Remote Access 161
Remote Control 25, 39
Remote Control, setting 130
Remote Maintenance, performing 135
Right of Publicity 14
S
Screen Display 41
Screen Layout, changing 71
Screen Standby Mode 27
Screen Standby, setting 127
Security 14
Security Settings 147
Self Diagnosis, performing 134
Software Update, setting 141
Sound, setting 127
Specifications, system 222
Sub Site 3
Sub Video Camera 34
System Initialisation, performing 160
T
Troubleshooting 203
U
Unit Information, viewing 104, 133
Unit Name, setting 118
USB Device Mode 132, 186
USB recording 82, 132, 183
Using Mobile Connection Enhanced Features 171
Using Multicast 172
V
Volume, adjusting 85

Notes

Panasonic Corporation
http://www.panasonic.com
Panasonic Corporation
Osaka, Japan
Authorised Representative in EU:
Panasonic Testing Centre

Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
© Panasonic Corporation 2017
PGQX1771RA PD1114KK8018

User Manual: HD Visual Communication Unit

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual: HD Visual Communication Unit

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual: HD Visual Communication Unit

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual

HD Visual Communication Unit

Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.

Document Version: 2018-01

Lifelike Video Conference Call

Home Electronics-style Remote Control Operation and Simple, Easy to

Stabilised Communication Quality

2 User Manual Document Version 2018-01

Dual stream (2 screens) compatible

Dual network compatibility (KX-VC1600/KX-VC2000)

Selectable Video Source

KX-VC Series NAT Traversal Service

Document Version 2018-01 User Manual 3

Making Video Conference Calls via SIP Server

Calling via an H.323 Gatekeeper

Enhanced Features through the Use of Activation Keys

Remote Video Camera Operation via Remote Control

4 User Manual Document Version 2018-01

Open Source Software

Document Version 2018-01 User Manual 5

6 User Manual Document Version 2018-01

Document Version 2018-01 User Manual 7

Changing the Site Name Display (Main Site only) .......................................................80

8 User Manual Document Version 2018-01

Performing Self Diagnosis ............................................................................................134

Document Version 2018-01 User Manual 9

Setting Multicast ...........................................................................................................175

10 User Manual Document Version 2018-01

Document Version 2018-01 User Manual 11

11) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms

12 User Manual Document Version 2018-01

10. Avoid placing the device in areas with high

7. Do not bring cards with magnetic strips, such

8. Do not bring the device near items that emit

9. Keep the device at least 10 cm (4 in) away from

Document Version 2018-01 User Manual 13

Data Security Privacy and Right of

Preventing Data Disclosure over the

14 User Manual Document Version 2018-01

For users in the European Union only

Document Version 2018-01 User Manual 15

For users in Taiwan only For Canada

FCC Note: This equipment has been tested and found

16 User Manual Document Version 2018-01

Accessory/Optional Accessory Information

Document Version 2018-01 User Manual 17

Proprietary main video camera

Model No.: KX-VD170 Model No.: GP-VD151

Model No.: GP-VD131

18 User Manual Document Version 2018-01

Model No.: KX-VCA001 Model No.: KX-VCA002

Document Version 2018-01 User Manual 19

20 User Manual Document Version 2018-01

Document Version 2018-01 User Manual 21

Part Names and Usage

Main Unit (Front)

Connected Device Audio Sent to Other Party

Boundary Microphone Audio is picked up only by the headset microphone. Audio

22 User Manual Document Version 2018-01